Location via proxy:   [ UP ]  
[Report a bug]   [Manage cookies]                

Sitrans Series

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 260

Getting Started 1

Introduction 2

Safety information 3
SITRANS
Description 4
Pressure transmitter
SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART) 5
Installing/mounting

Connecting 6
Operating Instructions

Operating 7

Commissioning 8

Parameter assignment 9

Functional Safety 10

Service and maintenance 11


Diagnostics and
troubleshooting 12

Technical data 13

Dimension drawings 14
7MF03.0
7MF04.0 Appendix A

List of abbreviations B

06/2018
A5E44852162-AA
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be
used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified
personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding
potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.
Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in
this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.

Siemens AG Document order number: A5E44852162 Copyright © Siemens AG 2018.


Division Process Industries and Drives Ⓟ 05/2018 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents

1 Getting Started...........................................................................................................................................11
1.1 Commissioning the device with display..................................................................................11
1.2 Commissioning the device without display.............................................................................13
2 Introduction.................................................................................................................................................15
2.1 Purpose of this documentation...............................................................................................15
2.2 Document history...................................................................................................................15
2.3 Product compatibility..............................................................................................................15
2.4 Scope of validity of this document..........................................................................................15
2.5 Checking the consignment.....................................................................................................16
2.6 Transportation and storage....................................................................................................16
2.7 Notes on warranty..................................................................................................................17
3 Safety information.......................................................................................................................................19
3.1 Precondition for use...............................................................................................................19
3.1.1 Warning symbols on the device.............................................................................................19
3.1.2 Laws and directives................................................................................................................19
3.1.3 Conformity with European directives......................................................................................20
3.2 Requirements for special applications...................................................................................20
3.3 Use in hazardous areas.........................................................................................................21
4 Description..................................................................................................................................................23
4.1 Area of application.................................................................................................................23
4.2 Structure.................................................................................................................................25
4.3 Nameplate layout...................................................................................................................26
4.4 Functional principle................................................................................................................28
4.4.1 Overview of mode of operation..............................................................................................28
4.4.2 How the electronics work.......................................................................................................29
4.4.3 Measuring cell operation........................................................................................................30
4.4.3.1 Measuring cell for gauge pressure.........................................................................................31
4.4.3.2 Measuring cell for gauge pressure, front-flush membrane.....................................................32
4.4.3.3 Measuring cell for absolute pressure from the gauge pressure series..................................32
4.4.3.4 Measuring cell for absolute pressure, front-flush membrane.................................................33
4.4.3.5 Measuring cell for absolute pressure from the differential pressure series............................34
4.4.3.6 Measuring cell for differential pressure and flow rate.............................................................35
4.4.3.7 Measuring cell for level..........................................................................................................36
4.5 Remote seal...........................................................................................................................37
4.6 System configuration..............................................................................................................37

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 3
Table of contents

5 Installing/mounting......................................................................................................................................39
5.1 Basic safety instructions.........................................................................................................39
5.1.1 Installation location requirements...........................................................................................41
5.1.1.1 Devices with marine approval................................................................................................42
5.1.2 Proper mounting.....................................................................................................................42
5.2 Installation (except level)........................................................................................................43
5.2.1 Installation configuration........................................................................................................43
5.2.2 Installation (except level)........................................................................................................44
5.2.3 Fastening with the mounting bracket.....................................................................................45
5.3 Installation (level)...................................................................................................................46
5.3.1 Mounting on the container......................................................................................................47
5.4 Installing "Remote seal".........................................................................................................50
5.4.1 Remote seal installation.........................................................................................................50
5.4.2 Installation of the remote seal with the capillary line..............................................................51
5.5 Removing...............................................................................................................................54
5.6 Rotating the display................................................................................................................55
5.7 Rotating the enclosure...........................................................................................................57
6 Connecting.................................................................................................................................................59
6.1 Basic safety instructions.........................................................................................................59
6.2 Connecting the device............................................................................................................62
6.2.1 Opening the device................................................................................................................62
6.2.2 Connecting the device............................................................................................................63
6.2.3 Closing the device..................................................................................................................64
6.3 Connect the Han cable socket to the cable............................................................................65
6.4 Connect M12 cable socket to the cable.................................................................................66
7 Operating....................................................................................................................................................69
7.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................69
7.2 Operating the device with display..........................................................................................70
7.2.1 Display...................................................................................................................................70
7.2.2 Navigating in the views..........................................................................................................71
7.2.3 Measurement view.................................................................................................................72
7.2.3.1 Display of measured values...................................................................................................73
7.2.3.2 Navigating in the measurement view.....................................................................................74
7.2.4 Parameter view......................................................................................................................74
7.2.4.1 List of parameters on the display...........................................................................................74
7.2.4.2 Navigating in the parameter view...........................................................................................76
7.2.5 Edit view.................................................................................................................................76
7.2.5.1 Changing parameter values...................................................................................................77
7.3 Remote operation...................................................................................................................77
7.3.1 Requirements.........................................................................................................................77
7.3.2 SIMATIC PDM........................................................................................................................77
7.4 Locking the device.................................................................................................................78
7.4.1 Setting the jumper..................................................................................................................79

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


4 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Table of contents

7.4.2 Enable user PIN.....................................................................................................................81


7.4.3 Enabling button lock...............................................................................................................81
8 Commissioning...........................................................................................................................................83
8.1 Basic safety instructions.........................................................................................................83
8.2 Switching on the supply voltage.............................................................................................84
8.3 Commissioning the device with display..................................................................................85
8.4 Commissioning the device without display.............................................................................87
8.5 Application examples.............................................................................................................88
8.5.1 gauge pressure, absolute pressure from the differential pressure series and absolute
pressure from the gauge pressure series..............................................................................88
8.5.1.1 Commissioning for gases.......................................................................................................88
8.5.1.2 Commissioning with steam or liquid.......................................................................................90
8.5.2 Differential pressure and volume flow....................................................................................91
8.5.2.1 Commissioning in gaseous environments..............................................................................91
8.5.2.2 Commissioning with liquids....................................................................................................92
8.5.2.3 Commissioning with vapor.....................................................................................................94
9 Parameter assignment...............................................................................................................................97
9.1 Overview of parameters and functions...................................................................................97
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display..................................................................101
9.2.1 Pressure units [01]...............................................................................................................101
9.2.1.1 Display of the pressure units................................................................................................102
9.2.1.2 Setting the pressure units....................................................................................................103
9.2.2 Set lower range value [02]/Set upper range value [03]........................................................104
9.2.2.1 Set lower range value parameter [02]..................................................................................104
9.2.2.2 Set upper range value parameter [03].................................................................................104
9.2.2.3 Set lower range value/upper range value (without pressure available)...............................104
9.2.3 Damping value [04]..............................................................................................................105
9.2.3.1 Set damping value...............................................................................................................106
9.2.4 Application [05].....................................................................................................................106
9.2.4.1 Pressure measurement........................................................................................................108
9.2.4.2 Level measurement..............................................................................................................109
9.2.4.3 Volume and mass flow measurements................................................................................111
9.2.4.4 Volume measurement..........................................................................................................114
9.2.4.5 Set application......................................................................................................................115
9.2.5 Application point [06]............................................................................................................115
9.2.6 Zero point adjustment [07]...................................................................................................116
9.2.6.1 Adjusting zero point (gauge pressure).................................................................................116
9.2.6.2 Adjusting the zero point (differential pressure).....................................................................117
9.2.6.3 Adjusting zero point (absolute pressure)..............................................................................117
9.2.7 Apply lower range value [08]/Apply upper range value [09].................................................118
9.2.7.1 Apply lower range value parameter [08]..............................................................................118
9.2.7.2 Apply upper range value parameter [09]..............................................................................118
9.2.7.3 Apply lower range value/upper range value (with pressure present)...................................119
9.2.8 Select fault current [10]........................................................................................................120
9.2.9 Lower fault current [11]........................................................................................................120
9.2.10 Upper fault current [12]........................................................................................................121
9.2.11 Lower saturation limit [13]....................................................................................................121
9.2.12 Upper saturation limit [14]....................................................................................................122

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 5
Table of contents

9.2.13 SV selection [15]..................................................................................................................123


9.2.14 Units [16]..............................................................................................................................123
9.2.14.1 Level units [16].....................................................................................................................123
9.2.14.2 Volume units [16].................................................................................................................124
9.2.14.3 Volume flow units [16]..........................................................................................................124
9.2.14.4 Mass flow units [16]..............................................................................................................125
9.2.15 Temperature units [17].........................................................................................................126
9.2.16 Lower scaling point [18].......................................................................................................126
9.2.16.1 Set lower scaling point.........................................................................................................127
9.2.17 Upper scaling point [19].......................................................................................................128
9.2.17.1 Set upper scaling point.........................................................................................................128
9.2.18 Low flow cut-off [20].............................................................................................................128
9.2.19 Vessel dimension A [21].......................................................................................................129
9.2.20 Vessel dimension L [22].......................................................................................................129
9.2.21 Button lock [23]....................................................................................................................130
9.2.21.1 Enabling button lock.............................................................................................................130
9.2.21.2 Disabling button lock............................................................................................................131
9.2.22 Change user PIN [24]...........................................................................................................131
9.2.23 Recovery ID [25]..................................................................................................................132
9.2.23.1 Display Recovery ID.............................................................................................................132
9.2.24 PIN recovery [26].................................................................................................................133
9.2.24.1 Recovering the user PIN......................................................................................................133
9.2.25 User PIN [27]........................................................................................................................134
9.2.25.1 Enable user PIN...................................................................................................................134
9.2.25.2 Disable user PIN..................................................................................................................135
9.2.26 Active device mode [28].......................................................................................................136
9.2.27 Functional Safety [29]..........................................................................................................136
9.2.28 Display test [30]....................................................................................................................136
9.2.29 Loop test [31].......................................................................................................................137
9.2.29.1 Loop test with preset loop current value..............................................................................137
9.2.29.2 Loop test with user defined loop current value.....................................................................138
9.2.30 Start view [32]......................................................................................................................138
9.2.31 Pressure reference [33]........................................................................................................139
9.2.32 Identify the device [34].........................................................................................................139
9.2.33 Reset [35].............................................................................................................................140
9.2.33.1 Reset to sensor calibration...................................................................................................140
9.2.33.2 Reset DAC trim to the factory setting...................................................................................140
9.2.33.3 Restore ordered configuration..............................................................................................141
9.2.33.4 Restore factory settings.......................................................................................................141
9.3 Parameter assignment over remote operation.....................................................................142
9.3.1 Introduction..........................................................................................................................142
9.3.2 Quick start............................................................................................................................142
9.3.3 Identification.........................................................................................................................143
9.3.4 Simulation............................................................................................................................143
9.3.4.1 Simulate constant pressure values .....................................................................................144
9.3.4.2 Simulate ramp function........................................................................................................145
9.3.4.3 Simulate diagnostics............................................................................................................145
9.3.5 Customized characteristic curve..........................................................................................146
9.3.5.1 Introduction..........................................................................................................................146
9.3.5.2 "Custom units" parameter....................................................................................................147
9.3.5.3 Set customized characteristic curve.....................................................................................147
9.3.6 Sensor calibration................................................................................................................148

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


6 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Table of contents

9.3.7 Diagnostics functions...........................................................................................................149


9.3.7.1 Limit monitoring and event counter......................................................................................149
9.3.7.2 Trend log..............................................................................................................................152
10 Functional Safety......................................................................................................................................153
10.1 Safety concept.....................................................................................................................153
10.1.1 Random and systematic errors............................................................................................153
10.1.2 SIL-compliant product version..............................................................................................153
10.1.3 Safety function.....................................................................................................................154
10.1.3.1 Device statuses....................................................................................................................156
10.1.3.2 Safety parameters................................................................................................................156
10.1.4 Operating modes of the device............................................................................................157
10.1.5 Device mode........................................................................................................................157
10.1.5.1 Validation.............................................................................................................................158
10.1.5.2 Safety-related parameters....................................................................................................159
10.1.5.3 Device mode "Functional Safety enabled"...........................................................................159
10.2 Enabling Functional Safety..................................................................................................160
10.2.1 Enabling Functional Safety over device with display...........................................................160
10.2.2 Enabling Functional Safety over remote operation..............................................................163
10.3 Acknowledging safety-related errors....................................................................................168
10.3.1 "Safety critical error" device mode.......................................................................................168
10.3.2 Acknowledging safety-related errors via remote operation..................................................169
10.4 Disabling Functional Safety over device with display...........................................................170
10.5 Disabling Functional Safety over remote operation.............................................................171
10.6 Proof test..............................................................................................................................172
10.6.1 Intervals and rules for proof test...........................................................................................172
10.6.2 Documenting a proof test.....................................................................................................173
10.7 Repair and service...............................................................................................................173
11 Service and maintenance.........................................................................................................................175
11.1 Basic safety instructions.......................................................................................................175
11.2 Cleaning...............................................................................................................................176
11.2.1 Cleaning the enclosure........................................................................................................176
11.2.2 Servicing the remote seal measuring system......................................................................176
11.3 Maintenance and repair work...............................................................................................177
11.3.1 Defining the maintenance interval........................................................................................177
11.3.2 Checking the gaskets...........................................................................................................178
11.3.3 Check cable glands..............................................................................................................179
11.4 Return procedure.................................................................................................................180
11.5 Disposal...............................................................................................................................180
12 Diagnostics and troubleshooting..............................................................................................................181
12.1 Device status symbols.........................................................................................................181
12.2 Diagnostic messages...........................................................................................................184
12.3 Troubleshooting...................................................................................................................190
12.3.1 Troubleshooting Functional Security....................................................................................190

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 7
Table of contents

13 Technical data..........................................................................................................................................191
13.1 Input.....................................................................................................................................191
13.1.1 Gauge pressure...................................................................................................................191
13.1.2 Gauge pressure with front-flush diaphragm.........................................................................192
13.1.3 Gauge pressure from the differential pressure series..........................................................193
13.1.4 Absolute pressure from the gauge pressure series.............................................................194
13.1.5 Absolute pressure with front-flush diaphragm......................................................................195
13.1.6 Absolute pressure from the differential pressure series.......................................................196
13.1.7 Differential pressure and flow...............................................................................................197
13.1.8 Level.....................................................................................................................................198
13.2 Measuring accuracy of SITRANS P320...............................................................................199
13.2.1 Reference conditions...........................................................................................................199
13.2.2 Effect of auxiliary power supply............................................................................................199
13.2.3 Gauge pressure...................................................................................................................199
13.2.4 Gauge pressure from the differential pressure series..........................................................201
13.2.5 Absolute pressure from gauge and differential pressure series...........................................202
13.2.6 Absolute pressure with front-flush diaphragm......................................................................203
13.2.7 Gauge pressure with front-flush diaphragm.........................................................................204
13.2.8 Differential pressure and flow...............................................................................................205
13.2.9 Level.....................................................................................................................................208
13.3 Measuring accuracy of SITRANS P420...............................................................................209
13.3.1 Reference conditions...........................................................................................................209
13.3.2 Effect of auxiliary power supply............................................................................................209
13.3.3 Gauge pressure...................................................................................................................209
13.3.4 Gauge pressure from the differential pressure series .........................................................210
13.3.5 Absolute pressure from gauge and differential pressure series...........................................212
13.3.6 Absolute pressure with front-flush diaphragm......................................................................213
13.3.7 Gauge pressure with front-flush diaphragm.........................................................................214
13.3.8 Differential pressure and flow...............................................................................................214
13.3.9 Level.....................................................................................................................................218
13.4 Output..................................................................................................................................219
13.5 Operating conditions............................................................................................................219
13.6 Vibration resistance..............................................................................................................224
13.7 Construction.........................................................................................................................225
13.8 Torques................................................................................................................................229
13.9 Display, keyboard and auxiliary power.................................................................................229
13.10 Certificates and approvals....................................................................................................230
14 Dimension drawings.................................................................................................................................233
14.1 SITRANS P320/P420 for gauge pressure and absolute pressure from the gauge
pressure series.....................................................................................................................233
14.2 SITRANS P320/P420 for differential pressure, gauge pressure, flow and absolute
pressure from the differential pressure series......................................................................235
14.3 SITRANS P 320/P420 for level............................................................................................237
14.4 SITRANS P320/P420 (front-flush).......................................................................................238

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


8 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Table of contents

14.4.1 Note 3A and EHDG..............................................................................................................239


14.4.2 Connections as per EN and ASME......................................................................................239
14.4.3 F&B and pharma flange.......................................................................................................240
14.4.4 PMC Style............................................................................................................................244
14.4.5 Special connections.............................................................................................................245
A Appendix...................................................................................................................................................247
A.1 Technical support.................................................................................................................247
A.2 Certificates...........................................................................................................................248
A.3 QR code label......................................................................................................................248
A.4 Checklist for Functional Safety.............................................................................................248
B List of abbreviations..................................................................................................................................251
B.1 Pressure transmitter abbreviations......................................................................................251
Glossary...................................................................................................................................................253
Index.........................................................................................................................................................257

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 9
Table of contents

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


10 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Getting Started 1
1.1 Commissioning the device with display

Introduction
In this section, you will learn how to commission the device step-by-step.
Before you start, please read the following safety information:
● General safety information (Page 19)
● Basic safety information: Installing/mounting
● Basic safety information: Connecting
● Basic safety information: Commissioning
Read the entire device manual in order to achieve the optimum performance of the device.

Procedure
1. Mount the device.
Installation (except level) (Page 43)
Installation (level) (Page 46)
2. Connect the device.
Connecting the device (Page 62)
3. Switch on the power supply.
Switching on the supply voltage (Page 84)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 11
Getting Started
1.1 Commissioning the device with display

4. Open the cover of the buttons:

Figure 1-1 Top view

5. Set the measuring range.


Set lower range value/upper range value (without pressure available) (Page 104)
Apply lower range value/upper range value (with pressure present) (Page 119)
6. Set the pressure unit.
Setting the pressure units (Page 103)
7. Set the application of your device.
Set application (Page 115)
8. Set the scaling points.
Set lower scaling point (Page 127)
Set upper scaling point (Page 128)
9. Set the zero point.
Adjusting zero point (gauge pressure) (Page 116)
Adjusting the zero point (differential pressure) (Page 117)
Adjusting zero point (absolute pressure) (Page 117)
10.Lock the device.
Locking the device (Page 78)
11.Enable Functional Safety (for devices with Functional Safety).
Enabling Functional Safety over device with display (Page 160)
You can find additional functions in the section Parameter assignment (Page 97)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


12 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Getting Started
1.2 Commissioning the device without display

1.2 Commissioning the device without display

Introduction
In this section, you will learn how to commission the device step-by-step.
Before you start, please read the following safety information:
● General safety information (Page 19)
● Basic safety information: Installing/mounting
● Basic safety information: Connecting
● Basic safety information: Commissioning
Read the entire device manual in order to achieve the optimum performance of the device.

Procedure
1. Mount the device.
Installation (except level) (Page 43)
Installation (level) (Page 46)
2. Connect the device.
Connecting the device (Page 62)
3. Switch on the power supply.
Switching on the supply voltage (Page 84)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 13
Getting Started
1.2 Commissioning the device without display

4. Open the cover of the buttons:

Figure 1-2 Top view

5. Operate the buttons as follows:

Apply lower range value (with pressure applied) Hold down the button for 3 seconds.
Apply upper range value (with pressure applied) Hold down the button for 3 seconds.
Zero point adjustment Hold down the buttons and for 3 seconds.
Set Upper fault current Hold down the button for 3 seconds.
Set Lower fault current Hold down the button for 3 seconds.

Additional functions are available with remote operation.


Parameter assignment (Page 97)

See also
Set lower range value/upper range value (without pressure available) (Page 104)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


14 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Introduction 2
2.1 Purpose of this documentation
These instructions contain all information required to commission and use the device. Read
the instructions carefully prior to installation and commissioning. In order to use the device
correctly, first review its principle of operation.
The instructions are aimed at persons mechanically installing the device, connecting it
electronically, configuring the parameters and commissioning it, as well as service and
maintenance engineers.

2.2 Document history


The overview below summarizes the most important changes in the documentation when
compared to the previous edition.

Edition Note
06/2018 First edition

2.3 Product compatibility


The following table describes the compatibility between the edition of this manual, the device
revision, the engineering system and the associated EDD.

Edition Comments Product compatibility Compatibility with device integra‐


tion package
06/2018 First edition HART 7 SIMATIC PDM V9.0 or higher
FW: 1.00.08 or higher AMS Device Manager V13 or high‐
HW: 1.00.00 or higher er
Device version 1 DTM Pactware V4.1 SP4
FC475 V3.9 or higher

2.4 Scope of validity of this document

Variant SITRANS P320 mA/HART SITRANS P420 mA/HART


Gauge pressure 7MF0300 7MF0400
Gauge pressure from the differential 7MF0310 7MF0410
pressure series
Absolute pressure from the gauge pres‐ 7MF0320 7MF0420
sure series

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 15
Introduction
2.6 Transportation and storage

Variant SITRANS P320 mA/HART SITRANS P420 mA/HART


Absolute pressure from the differential 7MF0330 7MF0430
pressure series
Differential pressure and flow rate, 7MF0340 7MF0440
PN 160 (MAWP 2320 psi)
Differential pressure and flow rate, PN 7MF0350 7MF0450
420 (MAWP 6092 psi)
Level 7MF0360 7MF0460

2.5 Checking the consignment


1. Check the packaging and the delivered items for visible damages.
2. Report any claims for damages immediately to the shipping company.
3. Retain damaged parts for clarification.
4. Check the scope of delivery by comparing your order to the shipping documents for
correctness and completeness.

WARNING
Using a damaged or incomplete device
Risk of explosion in hazardous areas.
● Do not use damaged or incomplete devices.

See also
Return procedure (Page 180)
Technical data (Page 191)

2.6 Transportation and storage


To guarantee sufficient protection during transport and storage, observe the following:
● Keep the original packaging for subsequent transportation.
● Devices/replacement parts should be returned in their original packaging.
● If the original packaging is no longer available, ensure that all shipments are properly
packaged to provide sufficient protection during transport. Siemens cannot assume liability
for any costs associated with transportation damages.

NOTICE
Insufficient protection during storage
The packaging only provides limited protection against moisture and infiltration.
● Provide additional packaging as necessary.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


16 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Introduction
2.7 Notes on warranty

Special conditions for storage and transportation of the device are listed in Technical data
(Page 191).

2.7 Notes on warranty


The contents of this manual shall not become part of or modify any prior or existing agreement,
commitment or legal relationship. The sales contract contains all obligations on the part of
Siemens as well as the complete and solely applicable warranty conditions. Any statements
regarding device versions described in the manual do not create new warranties or modify the
existing warranty.
The content reflects the technical status at the time of publishing. Siemens reserves the right
to make technical changes in the course of further development.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 17
Introduction
2.7 Notes on warranty

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


18 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Safety information 3
3.1 Precondition for use
This device left the factory in good working condition. In order to maintain this status and to
ensure safe operation of the device, observe these instructions and all the specifications
relevant to safety.
Observe the information and symbols on the device. Do not remove any information or symbols
from the device. Always keep the information and symbols in a completely legible state.

3.1.1 Warning symbols on the device

Symbol Explanation
Consult operating instructions

3.1.2 Laws and directives


Observe the safety rules, provisions and laws applicable in your country during connection,
assembly and operation. These include, for example:
● National Electrical Code (NEC - NFPA 70) (USA)
● Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) (Canada)
Further provisions for hazardous area applications are for example:
● IEC 60079-14 (international)
● EN 60079-14 (EU)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 19
Safety information
3.2 Requirements for special applications

3.1.3 Conformity with European directives


The CE mark on the device is a sign of conformity with the following European directives:

Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council on the harmonization
2014/30/EU of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility
Atmosphère explosible ATEX Directive of the European Parliament and the Council on the harmonization of
2014/34/EU the laws of the Member States concerning equipment and protective systems
intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres
Pressure Equipment Directive Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council on the harmonization
PED of the laws of the Member States relating to the making available on the market
2014/68/EU of pressure equipment
The directives applied can be found in the EU declaration of conformity for the associated
device.

WARNING
Improper device modifications
Risk to personnel, system and environment can result from modifications to the device,
particularly in hazardous areas.
● Only carry out modifications that are described in the instructions for the device. Failure
to observe this requirement cancels the manufacturer's warranty and the product
approvals.

3.2 Requirements for special applications


Due to the large number of possible applications, each detail of the described device versions
for each possible scenario during commissioning, operation, maintenance or operation in
systems cannot be considered in the instructions. If you need additional information not
covered by these instructions, contact your local Siemens office or company representative.

Note
Operation under special ambient conditions
We highly recommend that you contact your Siemens representative or our application
department before you operate the device under special ambient conditions as can be
encountered in nuclear power plants or when the device is used for research and development
purposes.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


20 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Safety information
3.3 Use in hazardous areas

DANGER
Using equipment with approval-related restrictions
Risk of explosion, damage to property due to operating conditions not in conformity with the
approval (e.g. temperature and pressure limits exceeded)
● Take note of the approval restrictions before using the device. You can find the information
on this in the current certificates.

See also
Certificates (Page 248)

3.3 Use in hazardous areas

Qualified personnel for hazardous area applications


Persons who install, connect, commission, operate, and service the device in a hazardous
area must have the following specific qualifications:
● They are authorized, trained or instructed in operating and maintaining devices and systems
according to the safety regulations for electrical circuits, high pressures, aggressive, and
hazardous media.
● They are authorized, trained, or instructed in carrying out work on electrical circuits for
hazardous systems.
● They are trained or instructed in maintenance and use of appropriate safety equipment
according to the pertinent safety regulations.

WARNING
Use in hazardous area
Risk of explosion.
● Only use equipment that is approved for use in the intended hazardous area and labelled
accordingly.
● Don't use devices that have been operated outside the conditions secified for hazardous
areas. If you have used the device outside the conditions for hazardous areas permanently
make all Ex markings unrecognizable on the nameplate.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 21
Safety information
3.3 Use in hazardous areas

WARNING
Loss of safety of device with type of protection "Intrinsic safety Ex i"
If the device has already been operated in non-intrinsically safe circuits or the electrical
specifications have not been observed, the safety of the device is no longer ensured for use
in hazardous areas. There is a risk of explosion.
● Connect the device with type of protection "Intrinsic safety" solely to an intrinsically safe
circuit.
● Observe the specifications for the electrical data on the certificate and/or in Technical
data (Page 191).

WARNING
Use of incorrect device parts in potentially explosive environments
Devices and their associated device parts are either approved for different types of protection
or they do not have explosion protection. There is a risk of explosion if device parts (such as
covers) are used for devices with explosion protection that are not expressly suited for this
type of protection. If you do not adhere to these guidelines, the test certificates and the
manufacturer warranty will become null and void.
● Use only device parts that have been approved for the respective type of protection in the
potentially explosive environment. Covers that are not suited for the "explosion-proof" type
of protection are identified as such by a notice label attached to the inside of the cover
with "Not Ex d Not SIL".
● Do not swap device parts unless the manufacturer specifically ensures compatibility of
these parts.

WARNING
Incorrect material for the diaphragm in Zone 0
Risk of explosion in the hazardous area. If operated with intrinsically safe supply devices of
category "ib" or devices of the flameproof enclosure version "Ex d" and simultaneous use in
Zone 0, pressure transmitter explosion protection depends on the tightness of the diaphragm.
● Ensure that the material used for the diaphragm is suitable for the process medium. Refer
to the information in the section "Technical data (Page 191)".

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


22 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Description 4
4.1 Area of application

Overview
Depending on the variant, the pressure transmitter measures corrosive, non-corrosive and
hazardous gases, vapors and liquids.
You can use the pressure transmitter for the following measuring tasks:
● Gauge pressure
● Absolute pressure
● Differential pressure
With the appropriate configuration and the necessary add-on parts (e.g. limiters and remote
seals), you can also use the pressure transmitter for the following measuring tasks:
● Level
● Volume flow
● Mass flow
● Volume
● Customized characteristic curve
The output signal for all measuring tasks is a direct current of 4 to 20 mA.
You can install the "intrinsically-safe" or "flameproof enclosure" version of the pressure
transmitter in hazardous areas. The devices have a test certification and comply with the
corresponding directives.
Pressure transmitters with remote seals of various shapes can be provided for special
applications. For example, measuring high-viscosity substances is a special application.
Operate the device in accordance with the specifications in section Technical data
(Page 191).

Gauge pressure
This version measures aggressive, non-aggressive and hazardous gases, vapors and liquids.
There are two series: a "differential pressure" series and a "gauge pressure" series. The
"differential pressure" series is distinguished by a high overload capability.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 23
Description
4.1 Area of application

Differential pressure and flow rate


This version measures corrosive, non-corrosive and hazardous gases, vapors and liquids. You
can use this version for the following measurement types:
● Differential pressure, e.g. effective differential pressure
● Gauge pressure, suitable for small positive or negative pressure value
● In combination with a restrictor device: flow rate q ~ ∆p

Level
This version with mounting flange measures the level of non-corrosive, corrosive and
hazardous liquids in open and closed containers.
The nominal size of the mounting flange is DN 40 to DN 125 or 1 1/2" to 5".
The negative connection of the measuring cell is kept open when measuring the level of open
containers. This measurement is referred to as "measurement against atmosphere". The
negative connection is normally connected with the container when measuring the level of
closed containers. This means the static pressure is present at both ends.
Wetted parts are made of various materials, depending on corrosion resistance requirements.

Absolute pressure
This version measures the absolute pressure of aggressive, non-aggressive and hazardous
gases, vapors and liquids.
There are two series: a "differential pressure" series and a "gauge pressure" series. The
"differential pressure" series is distinguished by a high overload capability.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


24 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Description
4.2 Structure

4.2 Structure
Depending on a customer-specific order, the device comprises different parts.





  


 




 

① Cover over buttons and nameplate with general information ⑨ Screw for the cover over the buttons
② Cover (front), optionally with inspection window ⑩ Cover (rear) for electrical terminal compart‐
ment
③ Display (optional) ⑪ Electrical terminal compartment
④ Safety catch (front) ⑫ Safety catch (back)
⑤ Retaining screw for rotation of the enclosure (Page 57) ⑬ Ground terminal
⑥ Process connection ⑭ Nameplate with information on the remote
seal
⑦ Nameplate with approval information ⑮ Blanking plug
⑧ Cable inlet, optionally with cable gland
Figure 4-1 Example

● The electronic housing is made of aluminum die casting or stainless steel precision casting.
● The housing has a removable cover at the front and the back.
● Depending on the device version, the front cover ② may be designed as an inspection
window.
● The cable gland ⑧ to the electrical terminal compartment is at the side; either the left or
right-hand one can be used. The unused opening is closed with a blanking plug ⑮.
● The ground terminal ⑬ is located on the side.
● The electrical terminal compartment ⑪ for the auxiliary power and shield is accessible
when you remove the back cover ⑩.
● The measuring cell with a process connection ⑥ is located in the lower section of the
enclosure.
The measuring cell is prevented from rotating by a retaining screw ⑤.
● Thanks to the modular design of the pressure transmitter, the measuring cell and application
electronics or terminal compartment can be replaced if required.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 25
Description
4.3 Nameplate layout

● The cover over buttons①, under which there are 4 buttons, is located on the upper face
of the enclosure. The nameplate with general information is located on the cover over
buttons.

4.3 Nameplate layout

Nameplate with general information


The nameplate with the article number and other important information, such as design details
and technical data, is located on the cover over the buttons.






 

 



① Article number (MLFB number) ⑦ Conformity with country-specific directives


② Serial number ⑧ QR code to the mobile website with device-
specific information
③ Materials, connection, diaphragm, O-ring, oil ⑨ Note operating instructions, certificates
and approvals
④ Minimum/maximum measuring span ⑩ Internal code with information for manufac‐
turer
⑤ Nominal pressure ⑪ Firmware and hardware identification
⑥ Degree of protection
Figure 4-2 Example

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


26 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Description
4.3 Nameplate layout

Nameplate with approval information


The nameplate with approval information is located on the front of the enclosure.

,,*([LD,,&777*D*E
D E F G H

1a Characteristics of the hazardous area


1b Type of protection
1c Group (gas, dust)
1d Maximum surface temperature (temperature class)
1e Device protection level
Figure 4-3 Example

Measuring point label


The measuring point label is fastened with a wire under the front cover.

Y01 (max. 5 characters) max. 10 characters

Y99: 1234
.... to .... mbar
Long tag (TAG)
< PD[FKDUDFWHUV Measuring point description
Y16 (max. 32 characters)

Figure 4-4 Example

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 27
Description
4.4 Functional principle

Nameplate with information on the remote seals


The nameplate with information on the remote seals is located on the back of the enclosure.

 


01&35&.1ާ 4JFNFOT"(
 %*"1)3"(.4&"-44"/%8*$)5:1& 7"$$6.4&37*$&/0]09:(&/ࣙާࣙCBS %&
 1 .'""""; /0.*4*;&13&4‫&ܝ‬95&/4*0/‫ܞ‬$-"44 ,BSMTSVIF
$ $ & '*--*/(-*26*%'00%(3"%&0*- '%"(3"%& "TTFNCMFEJO$BOBEB
4/+ 8&55&%."5%*"1) '-"/%61-&9  $PNQPOFOUTPG'SBODF


 
  

① Diaphragm remote seals of sandwich type ⑦ Nominal diameter/nominal pressure: 4 inch, 50


mm tube length, CLASS 600
② Article number (MLFB number) ⑧ Filling liquid: Food grade oil (FDA-compliant)
③ Order options ⑨ Wetted materials: Diaphragm duplex, 1.4462
④ Serial number ⑩ QR code for mobile website with device-specific
information
⑤ Operating temperature ⑪ Assembly and manufacturing location
⑥ Vacuum service: No, oxygen ≤ 60 °C;
≤ 50 bar
Figure 4-5 Example

4.4 Functional principle

4.4.1 Overview of mode of operation


This chapter describes how the pressure transmitter works.
First the electronics are described, and then the physical principle of the sensors which are
used with the various device versions for the individual measurement types.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


28 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Description
4.4 Functional principle

4.4.2 How the electronics work

Description

((3520 

   

,$
$ '
& & 8+
' $

+$57PRGHP
6HQVRUV ((3520


0HDVXULQJFHOOHOHFWURQLFV $SSOLFDWLRQHOHFWURQLFV

① Measuring cell sensor ⑧ Buttons


② Measuring amplifier ⑨ Display
③ Analog-to-digital converter ⑩ Connection for external ammeter
④ Microcontroller ⑪ EEPROM
⑤ Digital-to-analog converter IA Output current
⑥ EEPROM UH Auxiliary power
⑦ HART modem
Figure 4-6 How the electronics work

Function
● The input pressure is converted into an electrical signal by the sensor ①.
● This signal is amplified by the measuring amplifier ② and digitized in an analog-to-digital
converter ③.
● The digital signal is analyzed in a microcontroller ④ and corrected with regard to linearity
and thermal characteristics.
● The digital signal is then converted in a digital-to-analog converter ⑤ into the output current
of 4 to 20 mA.
A diode circuit provides reverse polarity protection.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 29
Description
4.4 Functional principle

● You can make an uninterrupted current measurement with a low resistance ammeter at
the connection ⑩.
● The measuring cell-specific data, electronics data and parameter assignment data are
saved in two EEPROM modules. The first EEPROM module ⑥ is linked to the measuring
cell, the second EEPROM module ⑪ to the electronics.
Operation
● The buttons⑧ can be used to call up individual functions.
● If you have a device with a display ⑨, you can view the measurement results, parameter
values and messages.
● With a computer and HART modem ⑦, you can operate the device via the engineering
system (e.g. SIMATIC PDM).

4.4.3 Measuring cell operation

WARNING
Destruction of the seal diaphragm
Danger of injury or damage to device
If the seal membrane is destroyed, the sensor may also be destroyed. If the seal membrane
is destroyed, no reliable measured values can be output.
Hot, toxic and corrosive process media can be released.
● Ensure that the material of the device parts wetted by the process medium is suitable for
the medium. Refer to the information in section Technical data (Page 191).
● Make sure that the device is suitable for the maximum operating pressure of your system.
Refer to the information on the nameplate and/or in Technical data (Page 191).
● Define maintenance intervals for regular inspections in line with device use and empirical
values. The maintenance intervals will vary from site to site depending on corrosion
resistance.

WARNING
Wetted parts unsuitable for the process medium
Danger of injury or damage to device.
Hot, toxic and corrosive media could be released if the process medium is unsuitable for the
wetted parts.
● Ensure that the material of the device parts wetted by the process medium is suitable for
the medium. Refer to the information in section Technical data (Page 191).

In the following sections, the process variable to be measured is called general inlet pressure.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


30 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Description
4.4 Functional principle

Overview
The following modes of operation are described:
● Gauge pressure
● Absolute pressure
● Differential pressure and flow rate
● Level
The following process connections are available, for example:
● G1/2 B, 1/2-14 NPT
● Male thread: M20
● Flange connection in accordance with EN 61518
● Flush-mounted process connections

4.4.3.1 Measuring cell for gauge pressure







SH

① Reference pressure opening ⑤ Filling liquid


② Measuring cell ⑥ Gauge pressure sensor
③ Process connection pe Inlet pressure
④ Seal diaphragm
Figure 4-7 Function chart of measuring cell for gauge pressure

The inlet pressure (pe) is transferred to the gauge pressure sensor ⑥ via the seal diaphragm
④ and the fill fluid ⑤, displacing its measuring diaphragm. The displacement changes the
resistance of the four piezoresistors (bridge circuit) of the gauge pressure sensor. The change
in the resistance causes a bridge output voltage proportional to the inlet pressure.
Pressure transmitters with measuring span ≤ 63 bar measure the inlet pressure against
atmosphere, those with measuring spans ≥ 160 bar the inlet pressure against vacuum.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 31
Description
4.4 Functional principle

4.4.3.2 Measuring cell for gauge pressure, front-flush membrane




SH 

① Reference pressure opening ⑤ Filling liquid


② Measuring cell ⑥ Gauge pressure sensor
③ Process connection pe Inlet pressure
④ Seal diaphragm
Figure 4-8 Function chart of the measuring cell for gauge pressure, flush mounted diaphragm

The inlet pressure (pe) is transferred to the gauge pressure sensor ⑥ via the seal diaphragm
④ and the filling liquid ⑤, displacing its measuring diaphragm. The displacement changes
the resistance of the four piezoresistors (bridge circuit) of the gauge pressure sensor. The
change in the resistance causes a bridge output voltage proportional to the inlet pressure.
Pressure transmitters with measuring span ≤ 63 bar measure the inlet pressure against
atmosphere, those with measuring spans ≥ 160 bar the inlet pressure against vacuum.

4.4.3.3 Measuring cell for absolute pressure from the gauge pressure series

 



SH

① Measuring cell ④ Filling liquid


② Process connection ⑤ Absolute pressure sensor
③ Seal diaphragm Pe Inlet pressure
Figure 4-9 Function chart of measuring cell for absolute pressure

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


32 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Description
4.4 Functional principle

● The inlet pressure (pe) is transferred to the absolute pressure sensor ⑤ via the seal
diaphragm ③ and the fill fluid ④, displacing its measuring diaphragm.
● The displacement changes the resistance of the four piezoresistors (bridge circuit) of the
absolute pressure sensor.
● The change in the resistance causes a bridge output voltage proportional to the inlet
pressure.

4.4.3.4 Measuring cell for absolute pressure, front-flush membrane






SH 

① Measuring cell ④ Filling liquid


② Process connection ⑤ Absolute pressure sensor
③ Seal diaphragm pe Inlet pressure
Figure 4-10 Function chart of the measuring cell for absolute pressure, flush mounted diaphragm

● The inlet pressure (pe) is transferred to the absolute pressure sensor ⑤ via the seal
diaphragm ③ and the filling liquid ④, and displaces its measuring diaphragm.
● The displacement changes the resistance of the four piezoresistors (bridge circuit) of the
absolute pressure sensor.
● The change in the resistance causes a bridge output voltage proportional to the inlet
pressure.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 33
Description
4.4 Functional principle

4.4.3.5 Measuring cell for absolute pressure from the differential pressure series

 SH



   

① Pressure cap ⑥ Overload diaphragm


② Seal diaphragm on the measuring cell ⑦ Measuring cell filling liquid
③ O-ring ⑧ Reference pressure
④ Measuring cell body pe Pressure input variable
⑤ Absolute pressure sensor
Figure 4-11 Function chart of measuring cell for absolute pressure

● Absolute pressure is transmitted to the absolute pressure sensor ⑤ through the seal
diaphragm ② and the filling liquid ⑦.
● When measuring limits are exceeded, the overload diaphragm ⑥ is displaced until the seal
diaphragm ② rests on the measuring cell body ④. The seal diaphragm thus protects the
absolute pressure sensor ⑤ from overload.
● The difference between the inlet pressure (pe) and the reference pressure ⑧ on the
negative side of the measuring cell displaces the seal diaphragm ②. The displacement
changes the resistance of the four piezoresistors (bridge circuit) of the absolute pressure
sensor.
● The change in the resistance causes a bridge output voltage proportional to the absolute
pressure.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


34 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Description
4.4 Functional principle

4.4.3.6 Measuring cell for differential pressure and flow rate

 
 




  

① Inlet pressure P+ ⑥ Filling liquid


② Pressure cap ⑦ Seal diaphragm
③ O-ring ⑧ Inlet pressure P-
④ Measuring cell body ⑨ Differential pressure sensor
⑤ Overload diaphragm
Figure 4-12 Function chart of the measuring cell for differential pressure and flow rate

● Differential pressure is transmitted to the differential pressure sensor ⑨ through the seal
diaphragms ⑦ and the filling liquid ⑥.
● When measuring limits are exceeded, the seal diaphragm ⑦ is displaced until the seal
diaphragm rests on the measuring cell body ④. The differential pressure sensor ⑨ is thus
protected against overloading since no further deflection of the overload diaphragm ⑤ is
possible.
● The seal diaphragm ⑦ is displaced by the differential pressure. The displacement changes
the resistance of the four piezoresistors (bridge circuit) of the differential pressure sensor.
● The change in the resistance causes a bridge output voltage proportional to the differential
pressure.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 35
Description
4.4 Functional principle

4.4.3.7 Measuring cell for level

 

 
 

 


 

① Inlet pressure P+ ⑦ Overload diaphragm


② Seal diaphragm on the measuring cell ⑧ Inlet pressure P-
③ Pressure cap ⑨ Filling liquid of the measuring cell
④ O-ring ⑩ Capillary tube with the fill fluid of the mounting
flange
⑤ Differential pressure sensor ⑪ Flange with a tube
⑥ Measuring cell body ⑫ Seal diaphragm on the mounting flange
Figure 4-13 Function chart of the measuring cell for level

● The inlet pressure (hydrostatic pressure) ① works hydraulically on the measuring cell
through the seal diaphragm on the mounting flange ⑫.
● The differential pressure at the measuring cell is transmitted to the differential pressure
sensor ⑤ through the seal diaphragms ② and the filling liquid ⑨.
● When measuring limits are exceeded, the overload diaphragm ⑦ is displaced until one of
the seal diaphragms ② or ⑫ rests on the measuring cell body ⑥. The seal diaphragms
② thus protect the differential pressure sensor ⑤ from overload.
● The seal diaphragm ② is displaced by the differential pressure. The displacement changes
the resistance of the four doped piezoresistors in the bridge circuit.
● The change in the resistance causes a bridge output voltage proportional to the differential
pressure.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


36 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Description
4.6 System configuration

4.5 Remote seal

Product description
● A remote seal measuring system comprises the following elements:
– Remote seal
– Transmission line, e.g. capillary line
– Pressure transmitter.
Note
Malfunction of the remote seal measuring system
If you separate the components of the remote seal measuring system, this results in
malfunctioning of the system.
Do not separate the components under any circumstances.

● The measuring system based on a hydraulic principle is used to transfer pressure.


● The capillary line and the remote seal diaphragm are the most sensitive components in the
remote seal measuring system. The material thickness of the remote seal diaphragm is
only ∼ 0.1 mm.
● The smallest of leakages in the transmission system leads to the loss of transmission fluid.
● The loss of transmission fluid results in inaccuracies in the measurement and failure of the
measuring system.
● In order to avoid leaks and measuring errors, please observe the installation and
maintenance instructions in addition to the safety notes.

WARNING
Use of a remote seal in devices with functional safety
Remote seals were not considered in the evaluation of the devices with regard to functional
safety.
For more information on evaluating the functional safety of your application, contact Technical
Support.

4.6 System configuration

Overview
The pressure transmitter can be used in a number of system configurations:
● As a stand-alone version, supplied with the necessary auxiliary power
● As part of a complex system environment, e.g. SIMATIC S7

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 37
Description
4.6 System configuration

System communication
Communication is via the HART protocol, using:
● HART Communicator (load 230 ... 1100 Ω)
● PC with HART modem on which appropriate software is installed, e.g. SIMATIC PDM (load
230 ... 600 Ω)
● Control system which can communicate via the HART protocol, e.g. SIMATIC PCS7

&RQWUROV\VWHP

6,0$7,&3'0
6
(70

RU

 $ 

 
/RDG
7UDQVPLWWHU $X[LOLDU\SRZHU

+$57 RU +$57
&RPPXQLFDWRU 0RGHP 3&ODSWRSZLWK
6,0$7,&3'0

Figure 4-14 Possible system configuration

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


38 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Installing/mounting 5
5.1 Basic safety instructions

DANGER
Pressure applications
Danger to personnel, system and environment will result from improper disassembly.
● Never attempt to loosen, remove, or disassemble process connection while vessel
contents are under pressure.

WARNING
Wetted parts unsuitable for the process media
Risk of injury or damage to device.
Hot, toxic and corrosive media could be released if the process medium is unsuitable for the
wetted parts.
● Ensure that the material of the device parts wetted by the process medium is suitable for
the medium. Refer to the information in Technical data (Page 191).

WARNING
Unsuitable connecting parts
Risk of injury or poisoning.
In case of improper mounting, hot, toxic, and corrosive process media could be released at
the connections.
● Ensure that connecting parts (such as flange gaskets and bolts) are suitable for connection
and process media.

WARNING
Exceeded maximum permissible operating pressure
Risk of injury or poisoning.
The maximum permissible operating pressure depends on the device version, pressure limit
and temperature rating. The device can be damaged if the operating pressure is exceeded.
Hot, toxic and corrosive process media could be released.
Ensure that maximum permissible operating pressure of the device is not exceeded. Refer
to the information on the nameplate and/or in Technical data (Page 191).

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 39
Installing/mounting
5.1 Basic safety instructions

WARNING
Incorrect material for the diaphragm in Zone 0
Risk of explosion in the hazardous area. If operated with intrinsically safe supply devices of
category "ib" or devices of the flameproof enclosure version "Ex d" and simultaneous use in
Zone 0, pressure transmitter explosion protection depends on the tightness of the diaphragm.
● Ensure that the material used for the diaphragm is suitable for the process medium. Refer
to the information in the section "Technical data (Page 191)".

WARNING
Loss of safety for devices with "flameproof enclosure" type of protection
Risk of explosion in hazardous areas. An explosion may be caused by hot gas escaping from
the flameproof enclosure if there is too little space between it and fixed parts (e.g. walls, pipes).
● Ensure that there is a minimum clearance of at least 40 mm between the flameproof joints
and the fixed parts.

 

① Flameproof joint

WARNING
Vibrations in the plant
Risk of injury or damage to device.
Vibration leads to material fatigue, for example, cracks and weld seams breaks.
Hot, toxic and corrosive process media can emerge.
● Make sure that you have mounted the pressure transmitter (including accessories)
protected against vibration.
Refer to the information on vibration resistance in the section Technical specifications.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


40 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Installing/mounting
5.1 Basic safety instructions

CAUTION
Hot surfaces resulting from hot process media
Risk of burns resulting from surface temperatures above 65 °C (149 °F).
● Take appropriate protective measures, for example contact protection.
● Make sure that protective measures do not cause the maximum permissible ambient
temperature to be exceeded. Refer to the information in Technical data (Page 191).

CAUTION
External stresses and loads
Damage to device by severe external stresses and loads (e.g. thermal expansion or pipe
tension). Process media can be released.
● Prevent severe external stresses and loads from acting on the device.

Note
Material compatibility
Siemens can provide you with support concerning selection of sensor components wetted by
process media. However, you are responsible for the selection of components. Siemens
accepts no liability for faults or failures resulting from incompatible materials.

5.1.1 Installation location requirements

WARNING
Insufficient air supply
The device may overheat if there is an insufficient supply of air.
● Install the device so that there is sufficient air supply in the room.
● Observe the maximum permissible ambient temperature. Refer to the information in the
section Technical data (Page 191).

CAUTION
Aggressive atmospheres
Damage to device through penetration of aggressive vapors.
● Ensure that the device is suitable for the application.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 41
Installing/mounting
5.1 Basic safety instructions

NOTICE
Direct sunlight
Increased measuring errors.
● Protect the device from direct sunlight.
Make sure that the maximum ambient temperature is not exceeded. Refer to the information
in the section Technical data (Page 191).

5.1.1.1 Devices with marine approval

Note
For vibrations in the direction of the measuring cell diaphragm, the measuring accuracy of the
pressure transmitter with flush-mounted diaphragm can deviate no more than 0.2% from the
respective specification.
● Install the device so that no or almost no vibrations occur in the direction of the diaphragms.
● To avoid measuring values that fluctuate strongly, use the damping function.
For information on vibration resistance, refer to the marine approval certificate.

5.1.2 Proper mounting

WARNING
Incorrect mounting at Zone 0
Risk of explosion in hazardous areas.
● Ensure sufficient tightness at the process connection.
● Observe the standard IEC/EN 60079-14.

CAUTION
Loss of type of protection
Damage to device if the enclosure is open or not properly closed. The type of protection
specified on the nameplate or in Technical data (Page 191) is no longer guaranteed.
● Make sure that the device is securely closed.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


42 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Installing/mounting
5.2 Installation (except level)

NOTICE
Incorrect mounting
The device can be damaged, destroyed, or its functionality impaired through improper
mounting.
● Before installing ensure there is no visible damage to the device.
● Make sure that process connectors are clean, and suitable gaskets and glands are used.
● Mount the device using suitable tools. Refer to the information in Technical data
(Page 191).

NOTICE
Use of line and cable entries made of plastic in hazardous areas
Device damage caused by impact at temperatures below -20 °C.
● Make sure that the line and cable entries are protected from impacts.

5.2 Installation (except level)

5.2.1 Installation configuration


The pressure transmitter can be configured above or below the pressure sampling point. The
recommended configuration depends on the aggregate state of the process medium.

Installation configuration for gases


Install the pressure transmitter above the pressure sampling point.
Lay the pressure tubing with a constant gradient to the pressure sampling point, so that any
condensation produced can drain in the main line and thereby avoid corruption of the measured
values.

Installation configuration for vapor and liquid


Install the pressure transmitter below the pressure sampling point.
Lay the pressure tubing with a constant gradient to the pressure sampling point so that any
gas pockets can escape in the main line.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 43
Installing/mounting
5.2 Installation (except level)

5.2.2 Installation (except level)

Mounting location
Verify that the mounting location meets the following conditions:
● Accessible
● Close to the measuring point
● Vibration-free
● Within the permitted ambient temperature values
Protect the pressure transmitter from:
● Direct heat radiation
● Rapid temperature fluctuations
● Heavy contamination
● Mechanical damage
● Direct sunlight

Requirement
● You have compared the desired operating data with the data on the nameplate.
● You have adhered to the information on the remote seal during its installation.

Procedure
1. Attach the pressure transmitter to the process connection.
Use an appropriate tool (e.g. open-ended wrench with width across flats 36). Otherwise,
the measuring cell may be damaged.
2. Turn only on the key area above the process connection.
Caution: If you turn the pressure transmitter on the housing, the measuring cell may be
damaged.
3. To guarantee secure and vibration-free installation of the pressure transmitter, fasten it to
a mounting bracket (Page 45).

See also
Commissioning the device with display (Page 11)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


44 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Installing/mounting
5.2 Installation (except level)

5.2.3 Fastening with the mounting bracket

Introduction
You mount the pressure transmitter with the mounting bracket as described below:
● On a mounting range
● On a vertical or horizontal pipe (Ø 50 to 60 mm)
When securing, observe the torques in the section Torques (Page 229).

Note
Install the device so that the pressure transmitter and the differential pressure lines are not
subject to different vibrations. Otherwise there is a danger that the differential pressure lines
will rupture.

Example 1: Pipe mounting of pressure transmitter (gauge pressure series)


The mounting bracket for the gauge pressure series includes, among other things:
● 2 screws
● One pipe clamp with nuts
● Washers
Mount the pressure transmitter as follows:

Example 2: Pipe mounting of pressure transmitter (differential pressure series)


The mounting bracket for the differential pressure series includes, among other things:
● 4 screws
● One pipe clamp with nuts
● Washers

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 45
Installing/mounting
5.3 Installation (level)

You can then mount the pressure transmitter in different positions:

5.3 Installation (level)

Mounting location
Verify that the mounting location meets the following conditions:
● Accessible
● Close to the measuring point
● Vibration-free
● Within the permitted ambient temperature values
Protect the pressure transmitter from:
● Direct heat radiation
● Rapid temperature fluctuations
● Heavy contamination
● Mechanical damage
● Direct sunlight

Note
Select the height of the mounting flange such that the pressure transmitter is always mounted
below the lowest fill height to be measured.

Requirement
● You have compared the desired operating data with the data on the nameplate.
● You have adhered to the information on the remote seal during its installation.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


46 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Installing/mounting
5.3 Installation (level)

Procedure
To install the pressure transmitter for level, proceed as follows:
1. Attach the seal to the container's mating flange.
Ensure that the seal is centrally positioned and that it does not restrict the movement of the
flange's seal diaphragm in any way. Otherwise, the seal of the process connection is not
guaranteed to be tight.
2. Screw on the pressure transmitter's flange.
3. Observe the installation position.

See also
Commissioning the device with display (Page 11)

5.3.1 Mounting on the container

Assembly on an open container


A line is not required when taking measurements in an open container since the negative side
is connected with the atmosphere.
Ensure that no dirt enters the open connection ports. For example by using connection screws
with a 7MF4997-1CP vent valve.

Formula:
)XOOVFDOHYDOXH Start of scale value: pMA = ρ · g · hU
Full-scale value: pME = ρ · g · hO

K2
6WDUWRIVFDOHYDOXH

K8

Measurement assembly on an open container

hU Lower filling level ΔpMA Start of scale value


hO Upper filling level ΔpME Full-scale value
p Pressure ρ Density of the measured medium in the
container
g Acceleration due to gravity

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 47
Installing/mounting
5.3 Installation (level)

Assembly on a closed container


When taking measurements in a closed container without or with little condensate formation,
the negative pressure line is not filled. Lay the line in such a way that condensation pockets
do not form. Install a condensation container if required.

6WDWLF Formula:
SUHVVXUH
*DVILOOHGORZ Start of scale value: ΔpMA = ρ · g · hU
SUHVVXUHOLQH
Full-scale value: ΔpME = ρ · g · hO
0D[LPXPOHYHO

)XOOVFDOHYDOXH

6WDUWRIVFDOHYDOXH
K2

K8

7UDQVPLWWHU
UHIHUHQFHOLQH

Measurement assembly on a closed container (no or little


condensate separation)

hU Lower filling level ΔpMA Start of scale value


hO Upper filling level ΔpME Full-scale value
p Pressure ρ Density of the measured medium in the
container
g Acceleration due to gravity

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


48 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Installing/mounting
5.3 Installation (level)

When taking measurements in a closed container with strong condensate formation, you must
fill the negative pressure line (mostly with the condensate of the measured medium) and install
a condensate pot. Lock the device using the dual pneumatic block 7MF9017-..A.

6WDWLF Formula:
SUHVVXUH &RQVWDQW
FRPSDULVRQ Start of scale value:
OHYHO
ΔpMA = g · (hU · ρ - hV · ρ')
0D[LPXPOHYHO Full-scale value:
ΔpMA = g · (hO · ρ - hV · ρ')
)XOOVFDOHYDOXH /LTXLGILOOHG
ORZSUHVVXUHOLQH

6WDUWRIVFDOHYDOXH KY
'
K2

K8

7UDQVPLWWHU -
UHIHUHQFHOLQH

Measurement assembly on a closed container (strong condensate


formation)

hU Lower filling level ΔpMA Start of scale value


hO Upper filling level ΔpME Full-scale value
hV Gland distance ρ Density of the measured medium in the
container
p Pressure ρ' Density of fluid in the negative pressure
line corresponds to the prevailing tem‐
perature there
g Acceleration due to gravity

The process connection on the negative side is a female thread 1/4-18 NPT or an oval flange.
Lay the line for the negative pressure using a seamless steel tube 12 mm x 1.5 mm.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 49
Installing/mounting
5.4 Installing "Remote seal"

5.4 Installing "Remote seal"

5.4.1 Remote seal installation

General installation instructions


● Keep the measuring system in the factory packing until it is installed in order to protect it
from mechanical damage.
● When removing from the factory packing and installing: ensure that damage to and
mechanical deformations in the membrane are prevented.
● Never loosen the sealed filling screws on the remote seal and the measuring instrument.
● Do not cause damage to the remote separating membrane; scratches on the remote
separating membrane, e.g. due to sharp-edged objects, are the main starting points for
corrosion.
● Select suitable gaskets for sealing.
● Use a gasket having an adequately large inner diameter for flanging. Insert the gasket
concentrically; contact with the membrane leads to deviations in measurements.
● When using gaskets made of soft materials or PTFE: follow the guidelines of the gasket
manufacturer, especially regarding the tightening torque and setting cycles.
● At the time of installation, use suitable fastening components such as screws and nuts that
are compliant with fitting and flange standards.
● Excessive tightening of screwed joints on the process connection may displace the zero
point on the pressure transmitter.
Note
Commissioning
If a shut-off valve exists, open the shut-off valve slowly when commissioning in order to
avoid pressure surges.

Note
Permissible ambient and operating temperatures
Install the pressure measuring device such that the permissible limits of ambient and
measured medium temperatures are not overshot or undershot even with the consideration
of the effect of convection and heat radiation.
● Note the effect of temperature on the measuring accuracy.
● When selecting the remote seals, ensure that fittings and flange components have
adequate pressure-temperature resistance by selecting suitable materials and pressure
ratings. The pressure rating specified on the remote seal applies to reference conditions
according to IEC 60770.
● For the maximum permissible pressure at higher temperatures, please refer to the
standard specified on the remote seal.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


50 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Installing/mounting
5.4 Installing "Remote seal"

Using remote seals with pressure measuring device for hazardous areas:
● When using remote seals with pressure transmitters in hazardous areas, the permissible
ambient temperature limits for the pressure transmitter must not be exceeded. Hot surfaces
on the cooling section (capillaries or cooling elements) are a possible source of ignition.
Initiate suitable measures.
● When remote seals with a flame arrestor are used, the pressure measuring instrument
determines the permissible ambient temperature. In the case of potentially explosive
gaseous atmosphere, the temperature around the flame arrestor must not exceed +60 °C.

5.4.2 Installation of the remote seal with the capillary line

Notes
● Do not rest the measurement assembly on the capillary line.
● Do not bend capillary lines; risk of leakages and/or risk of considerable increase in the
response time of the measuring system.
● Owing to the risk of bending and breakages, pay attention to mechanical overloads at the
joints such as capillary line-remote seal and capillary line-measuring instrument.
● Unwinding the excess capillary lines with a radius of at least 150 mm.
● Fasten the capillary line such that there are no vibrations.
● Permissible height differences:
– When installing the pressure measuring instrument above the measuring point, keep
the following in mind:
in the case of remote seal measuring systems with silicone, glycerin or paraffin oil filling,
the maximum height difference of H1max = 7 m must not be exceeded.
– If halocarbon oil is used as a fill fluid, this maximum height difference is H1max = 4 m, see
installation type G.
If negative overpressure is observed during measurements, reduce the permissible height
difference accordingly.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 51
Installing/mounting
5.4 Installing "Remote seal"

Installation type for differential pressure and flow rate measurements

Installation type D
Start of scale value:
pMA = pstart - ρoil * g * HV
Full scale value:
pME = pend - ρoil * g * HV
+ +9

+

Legend
pMA Start of scale value to be adjusted
pME Full scale value to be adjusted
pstart Start of scale value
pend Full scale value
ρoil Density of the filling oil in the capillary line of the remote seal
g Local gravitational acceleration
HV Gland distance

Installation types for level measurements (closed containers)

Installation type E
Start of scale value:
pMA = ρFL * g * HU - ρoil * g * HV
Full scale value:
pME = ρFL * g * HU - ρoil * g * HV

+
+9
+2

+8

Legend
pMA Start of scale value to be adjusted

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


52 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Installing/mounting
5.4 Installing "Remote seal"

pME Full scale value to be adjusted


ρFL Density of the measured medium in the container
ρoil Density of the filling oil in the capillary line of the remote seal
g Local gravitational acceleration
HU Start of scale value
HO Full scale value
HV Gland distance

Installation type G
H1 ≤ 7 m (23 ft), for halocarbon oil, however only H1
≤ 4 m(13.1 ft)
Start of scale value:
pMA = ρFL * g * HU - ρoil * g * HV
+ Full scale value:
pME = ρFL * g * HO - ρoil * g * HV

+ +
+9
+R

+X

Pressure transmitter for differential


pressure above the upper measuring
point, no vacuum
Installation type H
Start of scale value:
pMA = ρFL * g * HU - ρoil * g * HV
Full scale value:
pME = ρFL * g * HO - ρoil * g * HV

+

+

Below the lower measuring point


Installation type J

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 53
Installing/mounting
5.5 Removing

H2 ≤ 7 m (23 ft), for halocarbon oil, however only H1


≤ 4 m(13.1 ft)
Start of scale value:
pMA = ρFL * g * HU - ρoil * g * HV
+
Full scale value:
pME = ρFL * g * HO - ρoil * g * HV
+

Between the measuring points, no


vacuum
Legend
pMA Start of scale value to be adjusted
pME Full scale value to be adjusted
ρFL Density of the measured medium in the container
ρoil Density of the filling oil in the capillary line of the remote seal
g Local gravitational acceleration
HU Start of scale value
HO Full scale value
HV Gland distance

5.5 Removing

WARNING
Incorrect disassembly
The following risks may result from incorrect disassembly:
- Injury through electric shock
- Risk through emerging media when connected to the process
- Risk of explosion in hazardous area
In order to disassemble correctly, observe the following:
● Before starting work, make sure that you have switched off all physical variables such as
pressure, temperature, electricity etc. or that they have a harmless value.
● If the device contains hazardous media, it must be emptied prior to disassembly. Make
sure that no environmentally hazardous media are released.
● Secure the remaining connections so that no damage can result if the process is started
unintentionally.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


54 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Installing/mounting
5.6 Rotating the display

5.6 Rotating the display


To read the display in any mounting position, you have the option of gradually rotating the
display 360°.

Procedure
1. Switch off the power supply.
2. Use a 3 mm Allen key to loosen the front safety catch.
3. Unscrew the front cover.
4. Remove the display from the holder.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 55
Installing/mounting
5.6 Rotating the display

5. Rotate the display to the desired position.


Ensure that the flat ribbon cable of the display remains behind the holder when rotating the
display.

6. Press the display into the holder until it engages.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


56 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Installing/mounting
5.7 Rotating the enclosure

5.7 Rotating the enclosure

Introduction
To make the device easier to operate in any mounting position, you have the option of adjusting
the position of the enclosure within a range of 360°.

① Retaining screw

One retaining screw ① for the aluminum enclosure and two retaining screws (front and back)
for the stainless steel enclosure prevent that the flat ribbon cable is damaged while rotating
the enclosure.
The flat ribbon cable connects the sensor to the electronics.
The tightening torques of the retaining screws are different for the aluminum enclosure and
the stainless steel enclosure. For the tightening torques of the retaining screws, refer to section
Torques (Page 229).

Requirement
You have a 2.5 mm Allen key.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 57
Installing/mounting
5.7 Rotating the enclosure

Rotating the aluminum enclosure


1. Loosen the retaining screw ① by half a rotation.
2. Rotate the enclosure to the desired position (but no further than the end stop).
3. Tighten the retaining screw.

Rotating the stainless steel enclosure


1. Loosen the front retaining screw by half a rotation.
2. Loosen the back retaining screw by half a rotation.
3. Rotate the enclosure to the desired position (but no further than the end stop).
4. Tighten the front and back retaining screw.
To prevent the enclosure from turning in case of vibration, make sure that the front and
back retaining screw are tightened.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


58 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Connecting 6
6.1 Basic safety instructions

WARNING
Unsuitable cables, cable glands and/or plugs
Risk of explosion in hazardous areas.
● Use only cable glands/plugs that comply with the requirements for the relevant type of
protection.
● Tighten the cable glands in accordance with the torques specified in Technical data
(Page 191).
● Close unused cable inlets for the electrical connections.
● When replacing cable, glands use only cable glands of the same type.
● After installation, check that the cables are seated firmly.

WARNING
Incorrect conduit system
Risk of explosion in hazardous areas as result of open cable inlet or incorrect conduit system.
● In the case of a conduit system, mount a spark barrier at a defined distance from the device
input. Observe national regulations and the requirements stated in the relevant approvals.

WARNING
Lack of equipotential bonding
Risk of explosion through compensating currents or ignition currents through lack of
equipotential bonding.
● Ensure that the device is potentially equalized.
Exception: It may be permissible to omit connection of the equipotential bonding for devices
with type of protection "Intrinsic safety Ex i".

WARNING
Unprotected cable ends
Risk of explosion through unprotected cable ends in hazardous areas.
● Protect unused cable ends in accordance with IEC/EN 60079-14.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 59
Connecting
6.1 Basic safety instructions

WARNING
Improper laying of shielded cables
Risk of explosion through compensating currents between hazardous area and the
non‑hazardous area.
● Shielded cables that cross into hazardous areas should be grounded only at one end.
● If grounding is required at both ends, use an equipotential bonding conductor.

WARNING
Connecting device in energized state
Risk of explosion in hazardous areas.
● Connect devices in hazardous areas only in a de-energized state.
Exceptions:
● Devices having the type of protection "Intrinsic safety Ex i" may also be connected in
energized state in hazardous areas.
● Exceptions for type of protection "Increased safety ec" (Zone 2) are regulated in the
relevant certificate.

WARNING
Incorrect selection of type of protection
Risk of explosion in areas subject to explosion hazard.
This device is approved for several types of protection.
1. Decide in favor of one type of protection.
2. Connect the device in accordance with the selected type of protection.
3. In order to avoid incorrect use at a later point, make the types of protection that are not
used permanently unrecognizable on the nameplate.

NOTICE
Ambient temperature too high
Damage to cable sheath.
● At an ambient temperature ≥ 60 °C (140 °F), use heat-resistant cables suitable for an
ambient temperature at least 20 °C (36 °F) higher.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


60 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Connecting
6.1 Basic safety instructions

NOTICE
Condensation in the device
Damage to device through formation of condensation if the temperature difference between
transportation or storage and the mounting location exceeds 20 °C (36 °F).
● Before taking the device into operation let the device adapt for several hours in the new
environment.

NOTICE
Incorrect measured values with incorrect grounding
The device must not be grounded using the "+" connection. It may otherwise malfunction and
be permanently damaged.
● If necessary, ground the device using the "-" connection.

Note
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
You can use this device in industrial environments, households and small businesses.
For metal housings there is an increased electromagnetic compatibility compared to high-
frequency radiation. This protection can be increased by grounding the housing, see Technical
data (Page 191).

Note
Improvement of interference immunity
● Lay signal cables separate from cables with voltages > 60 V.
● Use cables with twisted wires.
● Keep device and cables at a distance from strong electromagnetic fields.
● Take account of the conditions for communication specified in the Technical data
(Page 191).
● Use shielded cables to guarantee the full specification according to HART/PA/FF.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 61
Connecting
6.2 Connecting the device

6.2 Connecting the device

6.2.1 Opening the device

Procedure

① Safety catch (optional)


② Cover of the electrical cable compartment.
Figure 6-1 Rear view of pressure transmitter

1. Use a 3 mm Allen key to loosen the safety catch ①.


2. Unscrew the cover of the electrical cable compartment ②.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


62 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Connecting
6.2 Connecting the device

6.2.2 Connecting the device

Procedure



˖




- Test +






① Feed separator with integrated load ⑥ Safety catch


② Supply voltage ⑦ Process connec‐
tion
③ Cable gland for supply voltage/current output ⑧ Protective conduc‐
tor connector/equi‐
potential bonding
terminal
④ Connecting terminals ⑨ Ground terminal
⑤ Test connector for DC measuring device
Figure 6-2 Example: Electrical connection with feed separator

1. Lead the connecting cable through the cable gland ③.


2. Connect the device to the plant using the existing protective conductor connection ⑧.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 63
Connecting
6.2 Connecting the device

3. Connect the wires to the connecting terminals ④ "+" and "-".


Ensure the correct polarity!
4. Apply the shield to the screw of the ground terminal ⑨.
The screw of the ground terminal is electrically connected to the external protective
conductor connection.

NOTICE
Incorrect measured values with incorrect grounding
The device must not be grounded using the "+" connection. It may otherwise malfunction
and be permanently damaged.
● If necessary, ground the device using the "-" connection.

6.2.3 Closing the device

Procedure

 

 

 

 

① Cover over buttons ⑤ Blanking plug


② Cable gland ⑥ Safety catch (front)
③ Safety catch (back) ⑦ Cover (front), optionally with inspection window
④ Cover (rear) for electrical terminal compartment
Figure 6-3 View of the pressure transmitter: Left: Back right: Front view

1. Screw on the cover ④ and ⑦ as far as it will go.


Make sure that there is no gap between enclosure and cover.
2. Secure each cover with the cover catch ③ and ⑥ by removing the screw.
3. Close the cover over the buttons①.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


64 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Connecting
6.3 Connect the Han cable socket to the cable

4. Tighten the screw for the cover over the buttons.


5. Check the tightness of the blanking plug ⑤ and cable gland ② in accordance with the
degree of protection.

6.3 Connect the Han cable socket to the cable

WARNING
Loss of the safety required for approval by using the Han plug
You may only use the Han plug for Ex ia devices and non-hazardous devices; otherwise, the
safety required for the approval is not guaranteed.

Note
Observe the protection class of the Han plug when defining the protection class.

The contact parts for the cable socket are supplied.


For devices with a Han plug mounted on the enclosure, make the connection via the cable
socket.

Requirement
● The terminal area of the cable socket is suitable for cables with diameters ranging from 6
to 12 mm.
● These cables use stranded wires with 1 mm2 as single conductors ("+", "-" and ground).
● You are using a crimping tool from HARTING (article number 09 99 000 0110).

Procedure
1. Slide the sleeve and the screwed joint on the cable.
2. Strip approx. 8 mm of the cable ends.
3. Crimp the contact parts on the cable ends.
4. Assemble the cable socket.

IA Output current
 
UH Auxiliary power
  

 

,$
 8+ 

Connector pin assignment with Han 7D or


Han 8D plug or cable socket

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 65
Connecting
6.4 Connect M12 cable socket to the cable

6.4 Connect M12 cable socket to the cable

Procedure

WARNING
Loss of safety required for approval by using the Han plug
The connector may only be used for Ex ia devices and non-Ex devices; otherwise the safety
required for the approval is not guaranteed.

Note
A conductive connection must not exist between the shield and the connector housing.

Note
Observe the protection class of the M12 device plug when defining the protection class.

In devices where a plug is already mounted on the enclosure, the connection is made via a
cable socket.
1. Thread the parts of the cable socket as described by the manufacturer.
2. Strip approximately 18 mm of the bus cable ①.
3. Twist the shield.
4. Thread the shield in the insulating sleeve.
5. Draw 8 mm of shrink sleeve over the cable, wires and shield up to the reference edge ②.
6. Screw the cable ends and the shield in the pin insert.
7. Fasten the parts of the cable socket as described by the manufacturer.
 



 



Figure 6-4 Preparing the connecting cable

① Reference edge for stripping ③ Insulating sleeve over the shield


② Reference edge for the dimension spec‐④ Shrink sleeve
ifications for cable assembly

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


66 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Connecting
6.4 Connect M12 cable socket to the cable

Pin assignment


   

   

 

Layout for M12 device connector Assignment diagram M12-cable socket


① M12 x 1 thread ① Positioning slot
② Positioning catch
1 + 1 +
2 Not connected 2 Not connected
3 - 3 -
4 Shield 4 Shield
Middle contact of the cable socket not
connected

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 67
Connecting
6.4 Connect M12 cable socket to the cable

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


68 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Operating 7
7.1 Introduction

Introduction
You operate the device using the keys.
If you have a device with a display, you can view the measured values, parameter values and
messages.
If you have a device without a display, you also have several functions available:
Commissioning the device without display (Page 87)

Buttons
The four buttons are located below the cover:

Figure 7-1 Top view

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 69
Operating
7.2 Operating the device with display

7.2 Operating the device with display

7.2.1 Display
This display has three different views.
● Measurement view
● Parameter view
● Edit view








 


  

① Display of:
● Name and unit of measured values (Measurement view)
● Name and unit of parameters (Parameter view, Edit view)
② Specifies whether there are previous parameters or subsequent parameters.
③ Display of:
● Measured value number
● Parameter number
● ID of the messages ⑦
④ Device is write-protected.
⑤ Device in the parameter view: When you press the button in the parameter view, the parameter
can be edited and the "EDIT" symbol flashes.
⑥ Functional Safety is enabled.
⑦ The ID ③ and the displayed "INFO" symbol serve to identify the diagnostic message.
For the IDs of the messages and their meaning, refer to the section "Diagnostics and troubleshoot‐
ing (Page 181)".
⑧ NE 107 symbols. For a description and priority, refer to the section "Diagnostics and troubleshoot‐
ing (Page 181)".
⑨ Bar graph display for measured values or progress indicator in wizards
⑩ Main line; 5-digit display of measured values and parameter values.
⑪ Sign of the measured value.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


70 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Operating
7.2 Operating the device with display

7.2.2 Navigating in the views

Requirement
You have opened the cover of the buttons:

Figure 7-2 Top view

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 71
Operating
7.2 Operating the device with display

Procedure
You navigate in the views with the buttons:

Views Buttons
Measurement view After the initialization, the measurement view is displayed.
1. Select a random measured value with the buttons or .
2. Change to the parameter view with the button.
3. Return to the measurement view with the button.

Parameter view The "EDIT" symbol has been deactivated permanently.


1. Select a parameter with the buttons or .
2. Change to the edit view with the button .
3. Return to the measurement view with the button.

Edit view The "EDIT" symbol flashes.


1. Change the parameter value with the or button.
2. Apply the change with the button.
You are in the parameter view.
3. Return to the measurement view with the button.
Parameter view If you do not change any parameters, you return from the edit view to the param‐
eter view with the button.

7.2.3 Measurement view

The measurement view shows the current measured values as well as status and diagnostic
messages:





① Name and unit of the measured value (alternating)


② Measured value
③ Measured value ID
④ Bar display
Figure 7-3 Example of measurement view

① shows the name of the measured value and the set unit as alternating values.
Measured value IDs ③ start with "P".

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


72 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Operating
7.2 Operating the device with display

The bar display shows the following information:


● The position of a measured value within the set measuring span (e.g. pressure).
● The position of the temperature value within the sensor limits.
● The scaling of the process values calculated from the pressure value (e.g. volume flow).

7.2.3.1 Display of measured values


The following measured values are always displayed:
● Pressure (P1)
● Sensor temperature (P2)
● Electronics temperature (P3)
● Percent of range (P9)
● Loop current (PA)
● Terminal voltage (PB)
The following values are calculated from the measured pressure value and are displayed
depending on your application:
● Level (P4)
● Volume (P5)
● Volume flow (P6)
● Mass flow (P7)
● Customized characteristic curve (P8)

Measured val‐ Name of measured value Meaning


ue ID
P1 PRESSURE Pressure
PRESS GAUGE Gauge pressure
PRESS ABS Absolute pressure
P2 SENSOR TEMP Sensor temperature
P3 ELECTR TEMP Electronics temperature
P4 LEVEL Level
P5 VOLUME Volume
P6 VOLUME FLOW Volume flow
P7 MASS FLOW Mass flow
P8 USER DEFINED Customized characteristic curve
P9 % OF RANGE Percent of range
PA LOOP CURRENT Loop current
PB CURR VOLTAGE Terminal voltage

You use the "Start view" parameter [32] to select the measured value that is displayed as the
first measured value in the measurement view.
Start view [32] (Page 138)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 73
Operating
7.2 Operating the device with display

7.2.3.2 Navigating in the measurement view

Requirement
You have disabled the button lock.
Disabling button lock (Page 131)

Procedure
1. Use the and buttons to navigate in the measurement view.
2. To switch to the parameter view, press the button.

7.2.4 Parameter view

The parameter view shows the parameters, parameter values and the wizards of the device.

① Name and unit of the parameter (alternating)


② Parameter value
③ Parameter ID
④ "EDIT" symbol (permanently enabled)
Figure 7-4 Example of parameter view

For parameters with an associated unit, the parameter name and unit are displayed as
alternating values in ①. Example: Lower range value in mA.

7.2.4.1 List of parameters on the display


The parameters are displayed with parameter ID and parameter name.
Depending on the parameter settings of your device, some parameters are not visible.

Parame‐ Parameter name on Meaning


ter ID the display
01 PRESS UNITS Pressure units (Page 101)
02 LOWER RANGE Set lower range value (without pressure applied) (Page 104)
03 UPPER RANGE Set upper range value (without pressure applied) (Page 104)
04 DAMPING Damping value (Page 105)
05 APPLICATION Application 1) (Page 106)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


74 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Operating
7.2 Operating the device with display

Parame‐ Parameter name on Meaning


ter ID the display
06 SQRT POINT Application point for volume flow and mass flow (VSLN and MSLIN) (Page 115)
07 ZERO POINT Zero point adjustment (Page 116)
08 APPLY LRV Apply lower range value (with pressure applied) (Page 118)
09 APPLY URV Apply upper range value (with pressure applied) (Page 118)
10 FAULT CURR Select fault current (Page 120)
11 LO FAULT CUR Lower fault current (Page 120)
12 UP FAULT CUR Upper fault current (Page 121)
13 SATURAT LOW Lower saturation limit (Page 121)
14 SATURAT HI Upper saturation limit (Page 122)
15 SV SELECT SV selection, set secondary variable (Page 123)
16 LEVEL UNITS Level unit (Page 123)
16 VOL UNITS Volume units (Page 123)
16 VFLOW UNITS Volume flow units (Page 123)
16 MFLOW UNITS Mass flow units (Page 123)
17 TEMP UNITS Temperature units for sensor and electronics temperature (Page 126)
18 LOWER SCALNG Lower scaling point (Page 126)
19 UPPER SCALNG Upper scaling point (Page 128)
20 LOW FLOW CUT Low flow cut-off for volume flow and mass flow (VSOFF and MSOFF) (Page 128)
21 VESSEL DIM A Vessel dimension A (Page 129)
22 VESSEL DIM L Vessel dimension L (Page 129)
23 BUTTON LOCK Enable and disable button lock (Page 130)
24 CHANGE PIN Change user PIN (Page 131)
25 RECOVERY ID Display Recovery ID (Page 132)
26 PIN RECOVERY PIN recovery (Page 133)
27 USER PIN Enable and disable user PIN (Page 134)
28 DEVICE MODE Active device mode (Page 136)
29 FUNCT SAFETY Enable and disable Functional Safety (Page 136)
30 DISPLAY TEST Display test (Page 136)
31 LOOP TEST Loop test (Page 137)
32 START VIEW Start view (Page 138)
33 PRESSURE REF Pressure reference (Page 139)
34 IDENTIFY Identify the device (Page 139)
35 RESET Reset (Page 140)

1) The "Application" parameter is also called the "Transfer function" in certain configuration
tools.
Hereinafter, the parameter ID is always written inside parentheses after the parameter name.
Example: Parameter "Damping value" [04].

See also
Parameter assignment over device with display (Page 101)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 75
Operating
7.2 Operating the device with display

7.2.4.2 Navigating in the parameter view

Requirement
The button lock is disabled.
Disabling button lock (Page 131)

Procedure
1. Use the or buttons to navigate within the parameters.
To navigate faster, keep the or button pressed.
After the last parameter, you jump to the first parameter, and vice versa.
2. To switch to edit view, press the button.
3. To return to the measurement view, press the button.

7.2.5 Edit view

You change the parameter values in the edit view. Wizards are available for specific
parameters.

Parameter values
There are various parameter values:
● Enumerations (e.g. unit)
● Numerical values (e.g. damping)

 

① Name of parameter and, if availa‐ ④ "EDIT" symbol (flashing)


ble, unit (alternating)
② Enumeration arrows (for enumera‐ ⑤ Parameter value
tions only)
③ Parameter ID
Figure 7-5 Example of edit view

For parameters with an associated unit, the parameter name and unit are displayed as
alternating values in ①. Example: Lower range value in mA.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


76 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Operating
7.3 Remote operation

7.2.5.1 Changing parameter values

Requirement
The button lock is disabled.
Disabling button lock (Page 131)

Procedure
1. Navigate to the parameter view (Page 71)
2. Select the desired parameter with the or button.
Use the button to confirm.
You are in the edit view.
3. Change the parameter value with the or button.
To navigate faster, keep the or button pressed.
4. Apply the change with the button.
Or, cancel the change with the button.

7.3 Remote operation

7.3.1 Requirements
You can operate the device using HART communication. The following is required for this
purpose:
● A handheld (e.g. FC475) or PC software such as SIMATIC PDM.
● A HART modem to connect a PC with the device or a lead to connect the handheld with
the device.

7.3.2 SIMATIC PDM

Overview
SIMATIC PDM (Process Device Manager) is a universal, multi-vendor tool for configuration,
parameter assignment, commissioning, diagnostics and maintenance of intelligent field
devices and field components. You can learn about retro-installations and obtain additional
information on SIMATIC PDM on the Internet at SIMATIC PDM (www.siemens.com/simatic-
pdm).
SIMATIC PDM monitors the process values, alarms and status signals of the device. The
software enables the display, comparison, adjustment, testing and simulation of device data
and the setting of calibration and maintenance due dates.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 77
Operating
7.4 Locking the device

You can find additional information, for example about installing and integrating devices or
commissioning the software, in the 'Help for SIMATIC PDM' operating manual. The manual is
supplied with the SIMATIC PDM software. Once you have installed SIMATIC PDM on your
computer, you can find the manual under: Start > Programs > Siemens Automation > SIMATIC
> Documentation. Link to our website: SIMATIC PDM instructions and manuals (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/products?dtp=Manual&pnid=16983&lc=en-WW).

Note
Field device parameters
● You can find a list of parameters and additional information in the section "Parameter
assignment (Page 97)".
● The field device remains in measurement mode during the time you configure the field
device.

Checking the version of SIMATIC PDM


If problems occur when using SIMATIC PDM, check on the Internet under www.siemens.com/
simatic-pdm (www.siemens.com/simatic-pdm) to determine whether you have the latest
version of SIMATIC PDM, the latest service package (SP) and the latest hotfix (HF).

Update of the Electronic Device Description (EDD)


The revision number of the EDD must match the firmware version of the device according to
the table in section Product compatibility (Page 15). To install a new EDD:
1. Go to the support page on the Internet in one of the following ways:
– Via Mobile app "Industry Online Support" (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/
de/sc/2067)
Download the app and scan the QR code on the rating plate of your device (Page 26).
– Via Software downloads (http://www.siemens.de/prozessinstrumentierung/downloads)
Enter the product name in the field "Enter search term...".
Select the "Download" option from the drop-down menu of the "Input type" field.
2. Download the EDD of your device from the Internet.
3. Start the "Device Integration Manager" of SIMATIC PDM, navigate to the EDD file and
select it.

7.4 Locking the device


The following options are available to lock the device:
● Enabling write protection using the jumper.
● Enabling write protection using the user PIN.
● Enabling write protection using the button lock.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


78 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Operating
7.4 Locking the device

Write protection Sym‐ ID Read measured values on Read parameters on the Change parameters
bol the display display via the device with dis‐
play
Jumper set L Yes No No
User PIN1) enabled LP Yes Yes Yes, after input of the
user PIN
Button lock enabled LL Yes No No

The user PIN is factory set to 2457 in the device. When delivered, write protection is disabled
1)

using the user PIN.

Devices with functional safety


To enable functional safety, you first enable the user PIN:

See also
Setting the jumper (Page 79)
User PIN [27] (Page 134)
Button lock [23] (Page 130)

7.4.1 Setting the jumper

Introduction
The jumper is used for enabling write protection.

Procedure
1. Switch off the power supply.
2. Remove the front cover connector of the device.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 79
Operating
7.4 Locking the device

3. Remove the display from the holder.

Figure 7-6 Position of the jumper ① on the board of the device as delivered

4. Set the jumper ① as follows:

Result
When the jumper is set, only the measured values can be read.
The display changes automatically between the measured values.
Operation via the buttons is disabled.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


80 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Operating
7.4 Locking the device

7.4.2 Enable user PIN

Requirement
The User PIN is disabled.

Procedure
1. Navigate into the parameter view.
AUTOHOTSPOT
2. Select the parameter "User PIN" [27].
3. Use the button to confirm.
The message "USER PIN ON" (User PIN enabled) appears for 2 seconds.

Result
The user PIN is enabled.

7.4.3 Enabling button lock

Procedure
1. Navigate into the parameter view.
Navigating in the views (Page 71)
2. In the parameter view, select the "Button lock" [23] parameter.
3. Press the button.
The "EDIT" symbol flashes.
4. Select ON with the or button.

5. Use the button to confirm.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 81
Operating
7.4 Locking the device

Result
● The display automatically returns to the measurement view.
● The display automatically changes between the measured values every 12 seconds.
● The symbol for button lock "LL" and the measured value ID are displayed alternately.

Note
For a device without display, you activate the button lock using remote operation.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


82 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Commissioning 8
8.1 Basic safety instructions

DANGER
Toxic gases and liquids
Danger of poisoning when venting the device: if toxic process media are measured, toxic
gases and liquids can be released.
● Before venting ensure that there are no toxic gases or liquids in the device, or take the
appropriate safety measures.

WARNING
Improper commissioning in hazardous areas
Device failure or risk of explosion in hazardous areas.
● Do not commission the device until it has been mounted completely and connected in
accordance with the information in Technical data (Page 191).
● Before commissioning take the effect on other devices in the system into account.

WARNING
Commissioning and operation with pending error
If an error message appears, correct operation in the process is no longer guaranteed.
● Check the gravity of the error.
● Correct the error.
● If the error still exists:
– Take the device out of operation.
– Prevent renewed commissioning.

WARNING
Loss of explosion protection
Risk of explosion in hazardous areas if the device is open or not properly closed.
● Close the device as described in Connecting (Page 59).

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 83
Commissioning
8.2 Switching on the supply voltage

WARNING
Opening device in energized state
Risk of explosion in hazardous areas
● Only open the device in a de-energized state.
● Check prior to commissioning that the cover, cover locks, and cable inlets are assembled
in accordance with the directives.
Exception: Devices having the type of protection "Intrinsic safety Ex i" may also be opened
in energized state in hazardous areas.

WARNING
Hazardous contact voltage
Risk of injury through hazardous contact voltage when the device is open or not completely
closed.
The degree of protection specified on the nameplate or in Technical data (Page 191) is no
longer guaranteed if the device is open or not properly closed.
● Make sure that the device is securely closed.

Note
Hot surfaces
Hot process medium and high ambient temperatures lead to hot surfaces which can cause
burns.
● Take corresponding protective measures, for example wear protective gloves.

8.2 Switching on the supply voltage

Requirement
● You have connected the device correctly.
● The terminal voltage on the device is correct. (Page 229)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


84 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Commissioning
8.3 Commissioning the device with display

Procedure
Switch on the power supply.
● Product name and firmware version appear briefly on the display.
● The measured values are shown on the display.
For a device without a display, you read off the current output as follows:
– Over the remote control (e.g. SIMATIC PDM).
– With a DC current measuring device.
Connecting the device (Page 62)

Result
The device is now ready for operation.

8.3 Commissioning the device with display

Introduction
In this section, you will learn how to commission the device step-by-step.
Before you start, please read the following safety information:
● General safety information (Page 19)
● Basic safety information: Installing/mounting
● Basic safety information: Connecting
● Basic safety information: Commissioning
Read the entire device manual in order to achieve the optimum performance of the device.

Procedure
1. Mount the device.
Installation (except level) (Page 43)
Installation (level) (Page 46)
2. Connect the device.
Connecting the device (Page 62)
3. Switch on the power supply.
Switching on the supply voltage (Page 84)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 85
Commissioning
8.3 Commissioning the device with display

4. Open the cover of the buttons:

Figure 8-1 Top view

5. Set the measuring range.


Set lower range value/upper range value (without pressure available) (Page 104)
Apply lower range value/upper range value (with pressure present) (Page 119)
6. Set the pressure unit.
Pressure units [01] (Page 101)
7. Set the application of your device.
Application [05] (Page 106)
8. Set the scaling points.
Lower scaling point [18] (Page 126)
Upper scaling point [19] (Page 128)
9. Set the zero point.
Adjusting zero point (gauge pressure) (Page 116)
Adjusting the zero point (differential pressure) (Page 117)
Adjusting zero point (absolute pressure) (Page 117)
10.Lock the device.
Locking the device (Page 78)
11.Enable Functional Safety (for devices with Functional Safety).
Enabling Functional Safety over device with display (Page 160)
You can find additional functions in the section Parameter assignment (Page 97)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


86 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Commissioning
8.4 Commissioning the device without display

8.4 Commissioning the device without display

Introduction
In this section, you will learn how to commission the device step-by-step.
Before you start, please read the following safety information:
● General safety information (Page 19)
● Basic safety information: Installing/mounting
● Basic safety information: Connecting
● Basic safety information: Commissioning
Read the entire device manual in order to achieve the optimum performance of the device.

Procedure
1. Mount the device.
Installation (except level) (Page 43)
Installation (level) (Page 46)
2. Connect the device.
Connecting the device (Page 62)
3. Switch on the power supply.
Switching on the supply voltage (Page 84)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 87
Commissioning
8.5 Application examples

4. Open the cover of the buttons:

Figure 8-2 Top view

5. Operate the buttons as follows:

Apply lower range value (with pressure applied) Hold down the button for 3 seconds.
Apply upper range value (with pressure applied) Hold down the button for 3 seconds.
Zero point adjustment Hold down the buttons and for 3 seconds.
Set Upper fault current Hold down the button for 3 seconds.
Set Lower fault current Hold down the button for 3 seconds.

Additional functions are available with remote operation.


Parameter assignment (Page 97)

8.5 Application examples

8.5.1 gauge pressure, absolute pressure from the differential pressure series and
absolute pressure from the gauge pressure series

8.5.1.1 Commissioning for gases

Requirement
All valves are closed.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


88 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Commissioning
8.5 Application examples

Procedure


 

 





 


Example: Measuring gases above the Example: Measuring gases below the
pressure tapping point pressure tapping point

① Pressure transmitter ⑤ Pressure line


② Shut-off valve ⑥ Shut-off valve
③ Shut-off valve to process ⑦ Shut-off valve (optional)
④ Shut-off valve for test connection ⑧ Condensate vessel (optional)
or for bleed screw ⑨ Blowout valve
To commission the pressure transmitter for gases, proceed as follows:
1. Open the shut-off valve for the test connection ④.
2. Via the test connection of the shut-off valve ②, apply the pressure corresponding to the
start of scale value to the pressure transmitter.
3. Ensure that the lower range value corresponds to the desired value. Otherwise, correct the
value.
4. Close the shut-off valve for the test connection ④.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 89
Commissioning
8.5 Application examples

5. Open the shut-off valve ⑥ at the pressure tapping point.


6. Open the shut-off valve for the process ③.

8.5.1.2 Commissioning with steam or liquid

Requirement
All valves are closed.

Procedure




 


① Pressure transmitter
② Shut-off valve
③ Shut-off valve to process
④ Shut-off valve for test connection or for bleed screw
⑤ Pressure line
⑥ Shut-off valve
⑦ Drain valve
⑧ Compensation vessel (steam only)

To commission the pressure transmitter for steam or liquid, proceed as follows:


1. Open the shut-off valve for the test connection ④.
2. Via the test connection of the shut-off valve ②, apply the pressure corresponding to the
start of scale value to the pressure transmitter.
3. Ensure that the lower range value corresponds to the desired value. Otherwise, correct the
value.
4. Close the shut-off valve for the test connection ④.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


90 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Commissioning
8.5 Application examples

5. Open the shut-off valve ⑥ at the pressure tapping point.


6. Open the shut-off valve for the process ③.

8.5.2 Differential pressure and volume flow

8.5.2.1 Commissioning in gaseous environments

Requirement
All shut-off valves are closed.

Procedure

 


   
 



 

 

 

 

Pressure transmitter above the differential pressure


transducer Pressure transmitter below the differential pressure
transducer
① Pressure transmitter ⑦ Blowout valves
② Stabilizing valve ⑧ Condensate vessels (optional)
③, ④ Differential pressure valves ⑨ Differential pressure transducer
⑤ Differential pressure lines ⑩ 3-way valve manifold
⑥ Shut-off valves
To commission the pressure transmitter for gases, proceed as follows:
1. Open both the shut-off valves ⑥ at the pressure tapping point.
2. Open the stabilizing valve ②.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 91
Commissioning
8.5 Application examples

3. Open the differential pressure valve (③ or ④).


4. Check and, if necessary, correct the zero point when the start-of-scale value is 0 bar (4 mA).
5. Close the stabilizing valve ②.
6. Open the other differential pressure valve (③ or ④).

8.5.2.2 Commissioning with liquids

Requirement
All valves are closed.

DANGER
Toxic liquids
Danger of poisoning when the device is vented.
If toxic process media are measured with this device, toxic liquids can escape when the device
is vented.
● Before venting, make sure there is no liquid in the device or take the necessary safety
precautions.

Procedure

 

 
 
 


  
  
 
 



  
 
  

Pressure transmitter below thedifferential Pressure transmitter above the differential pressure
pressure transducer transducer
① Pressure transmitter ⑦ Drain valves

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


92 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Commissioning
8.5 Application examples

② Stabilizing valve ⑧ Gas collector vessels (optional)


③, ④ Differential pressure valves ⑨ Differential pressure transducer
⑤ Differential pressure lines ⑩ Vent valves
⑥ Shut-off valves ⑪ 5-way valve manifold
To commission the pressure transmitter for liquids, proceed as follows:
1. Open both the shut-off valves ⑥ at the pressure tapping point.
2. Open the stabilizing valve ②.
3. With pressure transmitters below the differential pressure transducer, partially open both
drain valves ⑦ one after the other until liquid emerges without bubbles.
In the case of a pressure transmitter above the differential pressure transducer, partially
open both vent valves ⑩ one after the other until liquid emerges without bubbles.
4. Close both drain valves ⑦ or vent valves ⑩.
5. Partially open the differential pressure valve ③ and the vent valve (sealing plug with vent
valve) on the positive side of the pressure transmitter until liquid escapes without bubbles.
6. Close the vent valve (sealing plug with vent valve).
7. Partially open the vent valve (sealing plug with vent valve) on the negative side of the
pressure transmitter until liquid escapes without bubbles.
8. Close the differential pressure valve ③.
9. Partially open the differential pressure valve ④ until liquid escapes without bubbles.
10.Close the differential pressure valve.
11.Close the vent valve (sealing plug with vent valve) on the negative side of the pressure
transmitter.
12.Open the differential pressure valve ③ with half a revolution.
13.For a lower range value of 0 bar, check the zero point (4 mA) and correct the lower range
value if it is different.
14.Close the stabilizing valve ②.
15.Open the differential pressure valves (③ and ④) completely.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 93
Commissioning
8.5 Application examples

8.5.2.3 Commissioning with vapor

Requirement
All valves are closed.

WARNING
Hot vapor
Danger of injury or damage to device.
If the shut-off valves ⑥ and the differential pressure valve ③ are both open and the stabilizing
valve ② is then opened, the pressure transmitter ① can be damaged by the flow of vapor.
● Follow the specified procedure for commissioning.

WARNING
Hot vapor
Danger of injury.
You can briefly open the drain valves ⑦ to clean the line. Hot vapor can escape in the process.
● Only open the drain valves ⑦ briefly, and close them again before vapor escapes.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


94 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Commissioning
8.5 Application examples

Procedure

   

  


   


 

① Pressure transmitter ⑦ Drain valves


② Stabilizing valve ⑧ Condensate pots
③, Differential pressure valves ⑨ Differential pressure transducer/Orifice plate

⑤ Differential pressure lines ⑩ Insulation
⑥ Shut-off valves ⑪ 3-way valve manifold

To commission the pressure transmitter for vapor, proceed as follows:


1. Open both the shut-off valves ⑥ at the pressure tapping point.
2. Open the stabilizing valve ②.
3. Wait until the steam in the differential pressure lines ⑤ and in the equalizing vessels ⑧
has condensed.
4. Partially open the differential pressure valve ③ and the vent valve (sealing plug with vent
valve) on the positive side of the pressure transmitter until condensate escapes without
bubbles.
5. Close the vent valve (sealing plug with vent valve).
6. Partially open the vent valve (sealing plug with vent valve) on the negative side of the
pressure transmitter until condensate escapes without bubbles.
7. Close the differential pressure valve ③.
8. Partially open the differential pressure valve ④ until condensate escapes without bubbles.
9. Close the vent valve with blanking plug on the negative side ①.
10.Close the differential pressure valve.
11.Open the differential pressure valve ③ by half a revolution.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 95
Commissioning
8.5 Application examples

12.For the start of scale value 0 bar, check the zero point (4 mA).
If the differential pressure lines ⑤ have equally high condensate columns with the same
temperature, the measurement result is error-free. Otherwise, repeat the zero-point
adjustment.
13.Close the stabilizing valve ②.
14.Fully open the differential pressure valves ③ and ④.

Cleaning process cable


1. To clean the line, briefly open the drain valves ⑦.
2. Close the drain valve ⑦ before vapor escapes.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


96 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Parameter assignment 9
9.1 Overview of parameters and functions

Introduction
You can operate the device via local operation or remote operation (e.g. HART communicator,
SIMATIC PDM).
● The parameters that you can reach over the device with a display are marked by the
parameter ID. Hereinafter, the parameter ID is always written inside parentheses after the
parameter name. Example: Parameter "Damping value" [04].
● You can access the complete number of parameters via remote operation.
The device-specific parameters are available in each tool for configuration.
The instructions or online help for these tools will provide you with information on how to
use the different tools for parameter assignment.

List of parameters and functions


The following parameters are available via the local operation and via remote operation (e.g.
SIMATIC PDM).
The parameters are grouped according to their function in the following overview:

Quick start SIMATIC PDM Device with display Device without display
Quick start wizard Menu command "De‐ - -
vice > Wizard - Quick
start..."

Current output SIMATIC PDM Device with display (lo‐ Device without display
cal operation) (local operation)
Apply lower range value (with pressure applied) Menu command "De‐ Apply lower range val‐ Commissioning the de‐
Apply upper range value (with pressure applied) vice > Apply values" ue parameter [08] vice without display
(Page 118) (Page 13)
Apply upper range val‐
ue parameter [09]
(Page 118)
Set lower range value (without pressure applied) "Settings > Current out‐ Set lower range value -
Set upper range value (without pressure applied) put" parameter group parameter [02]
(Page 104)
Set upper range value
parameter [03]
(Page 104)
Set damping value "Settings > Current out‐ Damping value [04] -
put" parameter group (Page 105)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 97
Parameter assignment
9.1 Overview of parameters and functions

Current output SIMATIC PDM Device with display (lo‐ Device without display
cal operation) (local operation)
Set fault current "Settings > Current out‐ Select fault current Commissioning the de‐
put" parameter group [10] (Page 120) vice without display
Lower fault current (Page 13)
[11] (Page 120)
Upper fault current
[12] (Page 121)
Set saturation limits "Settings > Current out‐ Lower saturation limit -
put" parameter group [13] (Page 121)/Upper
saturation limit [14]
(Page 122)
Digital-to-analog converter adjustment Menu command "De‐ - -
vice > DAC trim"
Loop test Menu command "De‐ Loop test [31] -
vice > Loop test" (Page 137)

Application SIMATIC PDM Device with display (lo‐ Device without display
cal operation) (local operation)
Select pressure units "Settings > Units" pa‐ Display of the pressure -
rameter group units (Page 102)
Select the temperature unit for sensor and elec‐ "Settings > Sensor Temperature units [17] -
tronics temperature temperature units" pa‐ (Page 126)
rameter group
Set additional measuring task (e.g. level, volume "Settings > Select out‐ Application [05] -
flow, mass flow, volume, set customized charac‐ put > Application" pa‐ (Page 106)
teristic curve) rameter group
Set customized characteristic curve Menu command "De‐ - -
vice > Customized
characteristic curve"
Set scaling points "Settings > Current out‐ Lower scaling point -
put > Scaling" [18] (Page 126)/Upper
scaling point [19]
(Page 128)
Select unit of scaled value "Settings > Current out‐ Units [16] (Page 123) -
put > Scaling > Units"

Calibration SIMATIC PDM Device with display (lo‐ Device without display
cal operation) (local operation)
Correct the zero point error Menu command "De‐ Zero point adjustment Commissioning the de‐
vice > Zero point ad‐ [07] (Page 116) vice without display
justment" (Page 13)
Apply lower range value Menu command "De‐ Apply lower range val‐ Commissioning the de‐
Apply upper range value vice > Apply values" ue parameter [08] vice without display
(Page 118) (Page 13)
Apply upper range val‐
ue parameter [09]
(Page 118)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


98 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Parameter assignment
9.1 Overview of parameters and functions

Simulation SIMATIC PDM Device with display (lo‐ Device without display
cal operation) (local operation)
Simulate fixed pressure value / simulate ramp Menu command "De‐ - -
vice > Simulation >
Process values"

Identification SIMATIC PDM Device with display (lo‐ Device without display
cal operation) (local operation)
Read and configure identification data of your "Identification" param‐ - -
device eter group

Diagnostics SIMATIC PDM Device with display (lo‐ Device without display
cal operation) (local operation)
Read diagnostic log Menu command "De‐ - -
vice > Diagnostic log"
Display of the diagnostics Diagnostics and troubleshooting (Page 181) -
Simulate diagnostics Menu command "De‐ - -
vice > Simulation > Di‐
agnostics"
Limit monitoring and event counter Menu command "De‐ - -
vice > Limit monitoring
and event counter"
Device maintenance, sensor maintenance, serv‐ Menu command "Main‐ - -
ice, calibration tenance"
Display operating time Menu command "Diag‐ - -
nostics > Device status
> HART status"
Set peak values "Maintenance and di‐ - -
Reset peak values agnostics > Peak val‐
ues" parameter group
Menu command "De‐
vice > Reset peak val‐
ues"
Configure trend log Menu command "De‐ - -
Show trend log vice > Trend log set‐
tings"
Menu command "Diag‐
nostics > Trend log"

HART communication SIMATIC PDM Device with display (lo‐ Device without display
cal operation) (local operation)
Configure HART address Menu command "De‐ - -
vice > Assign address"
Set the loop current value in multidrop mode "Settings > Current out‐ - -
put > Loop current val‐
ue in multidrop mode"

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 99
Parameter assignment
9.1 Overview of parameters and functions

HART communication SIMATIC PDM Device with display (lo‐ Device without display
cal operation) (local operation)
Enable or disable the device identification via Menu command "De‐ Identify the device [34] -
HART vice > "Squawk" (Page 139)
Select secondary variable (SV) "Settings > Select out‐ SV selection [15] -
put > SV selection" pa‐ (Page 123)
rameter group
Select tertiary variable (TV) "Settings > Select out‐ - -
put > TV selection" pa‐
rameter group
Select quaternary variable (QV) "Settings > Select out‐ - -
put > QV selection" pa‐
rameter group

Write protection SIMATIC PDM Device with display (lo‐ Device without display
cal operation) (local operation)
Enable and disable user PIN Menu command "De‐ User PIN [27] -
vice > Security" (Page 134)
Change user PIN Menu command "De‐ Change user PIN [24] -
vice > Security > (Page 131)
Change user PIN"
Display Recovery ID Menu command "De‐ Recovery ID [25] -
vice > Security > PIN (Page 132)
recovery"
Restore user PIN Menu command "De‐ PIN recovery [26] -
vice > Security > PIN (Page 133)
recovery"
Enable and disable button lock "Security > Button Button lock [23] -
lock" parameter group (Page 130)

Display SIMATIC PDM Device with display (lo‐ Device without display
cal operation) (local operation)
Set pressure reference (absolute, gauge) "Display > Pressure Pressure reference -
reference" parameter [33] (Page 139)
group
Set start view - Start view [32] -
(Page 138)
Display test Menu command "De‐ Display test [30] -
vice > Squawk" (Page 136)

Reset SIMATIC PDM Device with display (lo‐ Device without display
cal operation) (local operation)
Device restart Menu command "De‐ - -
vice > Device restart"
Reset digital-to-analog converter to factory set‐ Menu command "De‐ Reset DAC trim to the -
ting vice > Reset > Restore factory setting
to factory DAC calibra‐ (Page 140)
tion"

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


100 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

Reset SIMATIC PDM Device with display (lo‐ Device without display
cal operation) (local operation)
Restore ordered configuration Menu command "De‐ Restore ordered con‐ -
vice > Reset > Restore figuration (Page 141)
ordered configuration"
Factory reset Menu command "De‐ Restore factory set‐ -
vice > Reset > Factory tings (Page 141)
reset"
Reset to sensor calibration Menu command "De‐ Reset to sensor cali‐ -
vice > Reset > Reset to bration (Page 140)
sensor calibration"

Functional Safety
The following additional functionality is available for devices with Functional Safety:

Functional Safety SIMATIC PDM Device with display (lo‐ Device without display
cal operation) (local operation)
Enable and disable Functional Safety Menu command "De‐ Functional Safety [29] -
vice > Functional Safe‐ (Page 136)
ty"

9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

Introduction
This section describes all parameters that you can reach over the device with a display.
You will find information on operating the device with display in the section Operating the device
with display (Page 70).
You can find the list of available parameters with ID and parameter name in the section List
of parameters on the display (Page 74).

9.2.1 Pressure units [01]

Introduction
With the "Pressure units" [01] parameter, you select the unit of the "Pressure" (P1) measured
value that is displayed in the measurement view.
You can find a description of the pressure units that you can set in the section Display of the
pressure units (Page 102).
With the "Pressure reference" parameter [33], you adapt the display of the pressure units to
your application, if necessary (absolute pressure or gauge pressure).

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 101
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

Both parameters are available using a local operation or over the remote operation.

Example

 

Pressure units ① and Pressure reference ② (alternating)

See also
Pressure reference [33] (Page 139)

9.2.1.1 Display of the pressure units


Certain units are displayed differently on the display and over remote operation.

Example: Display of unit "mmH2O" on the dis‐


play


Unit ① in the title bar Unit ② as enumeration

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


102 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

Setting range: Display (header line) Display (enumeration) Remote operation


mbar mbar mbar
bar bar bar
Pa Pa Pa
KPa KPa KPa
MPa MPa MPa
PSI PSI psi
G/cm2 G/cm2 g/cm2
KG/cm2 KG/c2 kg/cm2
KGF/cm2 KF/c2 kgf/cm²
mmH2O mmW68 mmH2O
mH2O(4 °C) mW4 mH2O (4 °C)
inH20 inW68 inH2O
inH2O(4 °C) inW4 inH2O (4 °C)
mmHG mmHG mmHg
inHG inHG inHg
hPa hPa hPa
atm atm atm
torr torr torr
Factory setting: mbar or as specified in the order

9.2.1.2 Setting the pressure units

Requirements
You know the parameter values for the "Pressure units" parameter. (Page 102)

Procedure
1. Navigate to the parameter view.
Navigating in the views (Page 71)
2. Select the "Pressure units" parameter [01].
3. Press the button.
4. Select the desired unit with the or button.
The pressure measurement is converted to the new pressure unit.
5. Use the button to confirm.
6. Navigate to the "Pressure reference" parameter [33].
7. Press the button.
8. Select the specific pressure unit for your application (absolute pressure, gauge pressure,
none) with the or button.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 103
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

Result
● The selected pressure unit and pressure reference are displayed as alternating values in
the measurement view.
● If the converted pressure measurement has more than 5 digits, "#####" appears in the
measurement view.

9.2.2 Set lower range value [02]/Set upper range value [03]

9.2.2.1 Set lower range value parameter [02]


Sets the lower range value without applied pressure.

Setting range: Within the measuring limits


Factory setting: 0 bar, or as specified in order

9.2.2.2 Set upper range value parameter [03]


Sets the upper range value without applied pressure.

Setting range: Within the measuring limits


Factory setting: Upper measuring range limit, or as specified in order

9.2.2.3 Set lower range value/upper range value (without pressure available)

Introduction
The lower range value (4 mA) corresponds to 0% of the measuring range. The upper range
value (20 mA) corresponds to 100% of the measuring range.
Without pressure available, you have the following options for assigning the desired pressure
measurements to the lower range value and the upper range value:

Device without display Device with display Remote operation


Set lower range value - "Lower range value" pa‐ Settings > Current out‐
rameter [02] put > Lower range value
Set upper range value - "Upper range value" pa‐ Settings > Current out‐
rameter [03] put > Upper range value

The minimum permissible measuring span of the measuring cell must not be fallen below. You
can find the minimum permissible measuring span of your measuring cell in the section
Technical data (Page 191)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


104 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

Requirement
● No pressure is present.
● You have a device with display.

Procedure
1. Navigate into the parameter view.
Navigating in the views (Page 71)
2. In the parameter view, set the "Lower range value" parameter [02].
3. Press the button.
4. Enter a value within the measuring limits with the and buttons.
5. Use the button to confirm.
The lower range value is set. Note that the upper range value does not move automatically.
6. Navigate to the "Set upper range value" parameter [03].
7. Enter a value within the measuring limits with the and buttons.
8. Press the button.
9. Set the lower range value with the and buttons.
10.Use the button to confirm.
The upper range value is set.

Result
You have set your measuring range.
● If the minimum permissible measuring span is fallen below, the message "FAILD" appears.

9.2.3 Damping value [04]

Sets the damping (filtering) for smoothing of sudden process value variations.

Setting range: 0.01 s ... 100 s, in steps of 0.01 s


Factory setting: 2 s, or as specified in order

The damping influences the reaction time of the device: When you increase the damping value,
the response time of the pressure transmitter to changes in the pressure measurement
increases.
● Reduce the damping value for faster response times. Specify a value that meets the
requirements regarding signal stability and response time.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 105
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

9.2.3.1 Set damping value

Procedure
1. Navigate to the parameter view.
Navigating in the views (Page 71)
2. Select the "Damping value" parameter.
3. Press the button.
4. Set the damping with the and buttons.
5. To set the damping in steps of 0.10 s, press and hold down the buttons.
6. Use the button to confirm.

Result
You have set the damping value.

9.2.4 Application [05]

You use the "Application" parameter to adjust the device for the following measuring tasks.
● Pressure measurement
● Level measurement
● Volume flow measurement
● Mass flow measurement
● Volume measurement
● Customized characteristic curve (only available via remote operation). (Page 146)

Characteristic curves
The device uses a linear characteristic curve for pressure and level measurements.
For volume and mass flow measurements, the device uses adjustable square root functions.
For volume measurement, the device uses the tank characteristic curves for various vessel
geometries.
In the "Customized characteristic curve" application, enter the breakpoints of the characteristic
curve using remote operation (e.g. SIMATIC PDM).
The set application acts directly on the current output:

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


106 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

3UHVVXUH 39
3URFHVV 'DPSLQJYDOXH
SUHVVXUH

/RZHUUDQJHYDOXH
8SSHUUDQJHYDOXH

'LVSOD\
+$57

HJOHYHOYROXPHIORZ
$SSOLFDWLRQ

 /RZHUXSSHU RIPHDVXULQJVSDQORRSFXUUHQW
VFDOLQJSRLQW

Figure 9-1 Flow diagram

You have various options for setting the measuring task of your device:

Device with display Remote operation


"Application" parameter [05] Settings > Select output > Application or using the
Quick start wizard

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 107
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

Setting range: Application Characteristic curve


Pressure PRESS Linear, proportional to pressure
Level LEVEL Linear, proportional to level
Volume flow VSLN Linear, square root
Proportional to flow rate, linear up
to the application pointApplication
point [06] (Page 115)
VSOFF Hold at 0, square root
Proportional to flow rate, deactiva‐
ted up to the application pointLow
flow cut-off [20] (Page 128)
VSLN2 Two-step linear - square root
Proportional to flow, two-step linear
up to the application point
VSL2B Two-step linear, square root (bidir‐
ectional)
Volume CYLIN Cylinder vessel
SPHER Sphere vessel
VLIN Linear vessel
CONIC Conical bottom vessel
PARAB Parabolic bottom vessel
HALF Half sphere bottom vessel
FLAT Flat sloped bottom vessel
PARAE Parabolic ends vessel
Mass flow MSLN Linear, square root
Proportional to flow rate, linear up
to the application pointApplication
point [06] (Page 115)
MSOFF Hold at 0, square root
Proportional to flow rate, deactiva‐
ted up to the application pointLow
flow cut-off [20] (Page 128)
MSLN2 Two step linear, square root
Proportional to flow, two-step linear
up to the application point
MSL2B Two-step linear, square root (bidir‐
ectional)
Customized characteris‐ CUSTM Custom
tic curve
Factory setting: PRESS, or as specified in order

9.2.4.1 Pressure measurement


To set the application of the device for the pressure measurement, select the "linear"
characteristic curve using the "Application" parameter (PRESS).
● The device uses a linear characteristic curve:

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


108 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display










     3EDU

● If the device is set for pressure measurement, no other measured variables (e.g. volume
flow) are available.

Example
For the pressure measurement, you set the following values, for example:

Damping value: 2.0 s


Lower range value: 0.0 bar
Upper range value: 5.0 bar
Application: Pressure: linear (PRESS)
Unit: bar
Lower scaling point: -
Upper scaling point: -

9.2.4.2 Level measurement


To set the application of the device for the level measurement, select the "level" characteristic
curve using the "Application" parameter (LEVEL).
For a level measurement, the device calculates the level height and the hydrostatic pressure.
The geometry of the vessel is not included in the calculation.
● The device uses a linear characteristic curve:

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 109
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display










     3EDU

Example
For the level measurement, you set the following values, for example:

Damping value: 2.0 s


Lower range value: 0.0 bar
Upper range value: 5.0 bar
Application: Level (LEVEL)
Unit: m
Lower scaling point: 0.0 m
Upper scaling point: 49 m

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


110 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

9.2.4.3 Volume and mass flow measurements


The following characteristic curves are available for volume and mass flow measurements:
● Hold at 0, square root (VSOFF, for volume or MSOFF, for mass flow)
The loop current is 4 mA up to the application point (low flow cut-off (Page 128)). Starting
from the application point, scaling occurs according to the square root:





IRUDSSOLFDWLRQSRLQW
6HWWLQJUDQJH

 ; $SSOLFDWLRQSRLQW




    EDU

Y Loop current or flow


X Set measuring span

● Linear, square root (VSLN, for volume or MSLN, formass flow)


The loop current has a linear relationship with the differential pressure up to the application
point (Page 115). Starting from the application point, scaling occurs according to the square
root:





IRUDSSOLFDWLRQSRLQW
6HWWLQJUDQJH

 ; $SSOLFDWLRQSRLQW


OLQHDU

    EDU

Y Loop current or flow


X Set measuring span

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 111
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

● Two step linear, square root (VSLN2, for volume or MSLN2, for mass flow)
The loop current has a proportional relationship with the flow rate, two step linear up to the
application point (Page 115).
The square root SLIN2 has a permanently defined application point of 10%. The range up
to this point contains two linear characteristic curve sections. The first section ranges from
the zero point to 0.6% of the output value and 0.6% of the pressure value. The second
section runs at a steeper slope up to the application point at 10% of the output value and
1% of the pressure value.
<


IRUDSSOLFDWLRQSRLQW
6HWWLQJUDQJH

 ; $SSOLFDWLRQSRLQW

 OLQHDU

OLQHDU    ;

Y Loop current or flow


X Set measuring span

● Two step linear, square root or bidirectional flow measurement (VSL2B, for volume or
MSL2B for mass flow)
For bidirectional flow measurement, enter symmetrical scaling values.
Select a lower scaling value that is symmetrical to the upper scaling value.
Example:
Upper scaling value: 1000 m3/s
Lower scaling value: -1000 m3/s
The output current in the range of 4 to 20 mA is halved in each case for the forward and
reverse measurements.
– The output current of 4 to 12 mA is used for the reverse measurement.
– The output current of 12 to 20 mA is used for the forward measurement.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


112 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

<

 P$

 P$


 P$
   ; 



        








Y Loop current or flow


X Set measuring span

Example: Volume flow (linear)


For the volume flow measurement, you set the following values, for example:

Damping value: 2.0 s


Lower range value: 0.0 mbar
Upper range value: 0.6 bar
Application: Linear, square root (VSLN)
Unit: m3/h
Lower scaling point: 0.0 m3/h
Upper scaling point: 300 m3/h

Example: Mass flow (linear)


For the mass flow measurement, you set the following values, for example:

Damping value: 1s
Lower range value: 0.0 mbar
Upper range value: 600 mbar
Application: Linear, square root (MSLN)
Unit: t/h
Lower scaling point: 0.0 t/h
Upper scaling point: 300 m3/ s

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 113
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

9.2.4.4 Volume measurement


For the volume measurement, the device uses tank characteristic curves for various vessel
shapes.

Display Vessel Description


CYLIN Cylinder vessel

SPHER Sphere vessel

LINR Linear vessel

CONIC Conical bottom vessel


①:Vessel dimension A

PARAB Parabolic bottom vessel


①:Vessel dimension A

HALF Half sphere bottom vessel


①:Vessel dimension A

FLAT Flat sloped bottom vessel


①:Vessel dimension A

PARAE Parabolic ends vessel


①:Vessel dimension A
②:Vessel dimension L
 

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


114 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

Example
For the volume measurement, you set the following values, for example:

Damping value: 2.0 s


Lower range value: 0.0 mbar
Upper range value: 500.0 mbar
Application: Cylinder vessel (CYLIN)
Unit: m3
Lower scaling point: 0.0 m3
Upper scaling point: 10.0 m3

9.2.4.5 Set application

Procedure
1. Navigate to the parameter view.
Navigating in the views (Page 71)
2. Select the "Application" parameter [05].
3. Select the parameter value.
Application [05] (Page 106)

Result
You have set the application of your device.

9.2.5 Application point [06]


Sets the application point from which scaling occurs according to the square root. Before the
application point, the scaling occurs in a linear relationship with the differential pressure.
This parameter is only visible when you have selected "Linear, square root" (VSLIN or MSLIN)
or "Hold at 0, square root" (VSOFF or MSOFF) using the "Application" parameter.

Setting range: 5 to 15%


Factory setting: 10%

See also
Volume and mass flow measurements (Page 111)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 115
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

9.2.6 Zero point adjustment [07]

Introduction
A series of factors, such as installation, static pressure, temperature or long-term stability, can
cause zero-point errors.
The following options are available to correct zero-point errors:

Device without display Device with display Remote operation


Press the button and hold for "Zero point adjustment" parame‐ Device > Zero point adjustment
3 seconds. ter

For special applications (e.g. level measurement for a closed vessel), you have the option of
shifting the zero point to a desired pressure value using the "Zero point adjustment" parameter.
You proceed differently depending on the device version.

9.2.6.1 Adjusting zero point (gauge pressure)

Requirement
The pressure measurement is stable.

Procedure
1. Vent the pressure connection of the device.
2. Navigate into the parameter view.
Navigating in the views (Page 71)
3. In the parameter view, select the "Zero point adjustment" parameter [07].
4. Press the button.
5. Set the zero point to 0.
6. Change to the measurement view with the button.

Note
Depending on the damping setting, a settling time elapses until the pressure measurement 0
appears in the measurement view.
● For this reason, vent the pressure connection of the device up to the end of the operation.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


116 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

Result
● The device displays the pressure measurement 0 in the set unit.
● The effective measuring range is reduced by the amount of the upstream pressure.
Example: With an upstream pressure of 100 mbar, the effective measuring range of a 1-
bar pressure transmitter is reduced to a point between 0 and 0.9 bar.

9.2.6.2 Adjusting the zero point (differential pressure)

Requirement
The pressure measurement is stable.

Procedure
1. Make sure there is identical pressure in the two process connections.
2. Navigate into the parameter view.
Navigating in the views (Page 71)
3. In the parameter view, select the "Zero point adjustment" parameter [07].
4. Press the button.
5. Set the zero point to 0.
6. Change to the measurement view with the button.

Note
Depending on the damping setting, a settling time elapses until the pressure measurement 0
is displayed.
● Make sure there is identical pressure in the two process connections until the end of the
operation.

Result
● The device displays pressure measurement 0 in the set unit.
● The effective measuring range is reduced by the amount of the upstream pressure.
Example: At a pre-load pressure of 25 mbar, the upper measuring range limit of a 250 mbar
pressure transmitter is reduced to 225 mbar.

9.2.6.3 Adjusting zero point (absolute pressure)

Requirement
You have created a reference pressure that is within the measurement limits.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 117
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

Procedure
1. In the parameter view, select the "Zero point adjustment" parameter [07].
2. Navigate into the parameter view.
Navigating in the views (Page 71)
3. Press the button.
4. The value "0" appears on the display.
5. Confirm the value by pressing the button.
6. Change to the measurement view with the button.

Result
The device displays pressure measurement 0.0 in the set unit.
Depending on the set damping, the settling time is extended until the pressure measurement
0 is displayed.

Note
For devices for absolute pressure, the lower range value is at vacuum (0 bar a).
The zero point adjustment for devices for absolute pressure that do not measure absolute
pressure (0 bar a) leads to incorrect settings.

Note
The effective measuring range is reduced by the amount of the upstream pressure.
Example: With an upstream pressure of 10 mbar, the effective measuring range of a 1300 mbar
pressure transmitter is reduced to a point between 0 and 1290 mbar.

9.2.7 Apply lower range value [08]/Apply upper range value [09]

9.2.7.1 Apply lower range value parameter [08]


Sets the lower range value to the current reference pressure.

Setting range: Within the measuring limits


Factory setting: See nameplate (depending on measuring cell)

9.2.7.2 Apply upper range value parameter [09]


Sets the upper range value to the current reference pressure.

Setting range: Within the measuring limits


Factory setting: See nameplate (depending on measuring cell)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


118 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

9.2.7.3 Apply lower range value/upper range value (with pressure present)

Introduction
The lower range value (4 mA) corresponds to 0% of the measuring range. The upper range
value (20 mA) corresponds to 100% of the measuring range.
With pressure present, you have the following options for assigning the desired pressure
measurements to the lower range value and the upper range value:

Device without display Device with display Remote operation


Apply lower range value Hold down the button "Apply lower range val‐ "Device > Apply values"
for 3 seconds. ue" parameter [08] menu
Apply upper range value Hold down the button "Apply upper range val‐ "Device > Apply values"
for 3 seconds. ue" parameter [09] menu

The minimum permissible measuring span of the measuring cell must not be fallen below. You
can find the minimum permissible measuring span of your measuring cell in the section
Technical data (Page 191)

Example: Measuring cell 0 to 16 bar


1. The measuring range is from 0 to 16 bar.
 
S>EDU@

 
,>P$@

2. You set the lower range value from 0 bar to 1 bar.


In order for the measuring span to stay constant, the upper range value is automatically
shifted from 16 bar to 17 bar.
   
S>EDU@

  
,>P$@

3. You set the upper range value from 17 bar to 15 bar.


   
S>EDU@

 
,>P$@

The measuring span is 14 bar.

Requirement
● A pressure is applied, e.g. the device is already mounted.
● The pressure is within the measuring limits.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 119
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

Procedure
1. Navigate into the parameter view.
Navigating in the views (Page 71)
2. Select the "Apply lower range value" parameter [08].
3. Press the button.
The existing pressure is displayed.
4. Use the button to confirm.
The wizard starts.
The wizard ends with the "COMPL" message.
5. Navigate to the "Apply upper range value" parameter [09].
The existing pressure is displayed.
6. Press the button.
The wizard starts.
The wizard ends with the "COMPL" message.

Note
The wizard ends with the "FAILD" message in the following cases:
● The pressure exceeds or falls below the measuring limits.
● The measuring span is below the minimum permissible span.

9.2.8 Select fault current [10]


Selects whether the lower or upper fault current is output when a fault occurs (e.g. hardware/
firmware error, sensor break).

Setting range: UPPER Upper fault current


LOWER Lower fault current
Factory setting: LOWER , or as specified in order

Devices with functional safety


When a safety-oriented error is detected in the device in "Functional Safety enabled" device
mode, the current output signal corresponds to the upper fault current ≤ 3.55 mA.

9.2.9 Lower fault current [11]


Adjusts the magnitude of the lower fault current ②.

Setting range: Between 3.55 mA and lower saturation limit ③


Factory setting: 3.55 mA, or as specified in order

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


120 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

3.55 mA 3.8 mA 4 mA 20 mA 20.5 mA 22.8 mA


   

① Normal operation
② Lower fault current (factory setting)
③ Lower saturation limit (factory setting)
④ Upper saturation limit (factory setting)
⑤ Upper fault current (factory setting)

9.2.10 Upper fault current [12]


Adjusts the magnitude of the upper fault current ⑤.

Setting range: Between upper saturation limit ④ und 22.8 mA


Factory setting: 22.8 mA, or as specified in order

3.55 mA 3.8 mA 4 mA 20 mA 20.5 mA 22.8 mA


   

① Normal operation
② Lower fault current (factory setting)
③ Lower saturation limit (factory setting)
④ Upper saturation limit (factory setting)
⑤ Upper fault current (factory setting)

9.2.11 Lower saturation limit [13]


Sets the lower threshold for the lower saturation limit③.
The loop current cannot drop below the set threshold.

Setting range: Between lower fault current② and 4 mA


Factory setting: 3.8 mA, or as specified in order

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 121
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

3.55 mA 3.8 mA 4 mA 20 mA 20.5 mA 22.8 mA


   

① Normal operation
② Lower fault current (factory setting)
③ Lower saturation limit (factory setting)
④ Upper saturation limit (factory setting)
⑤ Upper fault current (factory setting)

9.2.12 Upper saturation limit [14]


Sets the threshold for the upper saturation limit④.

Setting range: Between 20 mA and the upper fault current


Factory setting: 20.5 mA, or as specified in order

3.55 mA 3.8 mA 4 mA 20 mA 20.5 mA 22.8 mA


   

① Normal operation
② Lower fault current (factory setting)
③ Lower saturation limit (factory setting)
④ Upper saturation limit (factory setting)
⑤ Upper fault current (factory setting)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


122 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

9.2.13 SV selection [15]


Sets a measured value as a secondary variable (SV).

Setting range: TEMP Sensor temperature


ETEMP Electronics temperature
LEVEL Level
VOL Volume
VFLOW Volume flow
USER Custom
MFLOW Mass flow
Factory setting: As specified in order

9.2.14 Units [16]

Introduction
Depending on the application of the device that you have selected using the "Application"
parameter, you have the option of selecting a unit:
● Level
● Volume
● Volume flow
● Mass flow
The selected unit is displayed in the measurement view.
Use the remote operation to set the associated unit for the "Customized characteristic curve"
application.

See also
Application [05] (Page 106)

9.2.14.1 Level units [16]


Selects the unit for the "Level" measurement.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 123
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

This parameter is only visible when you have selected the "Level" characteristic curve using
the "Application" parameter.

Setting range: m
cm
mm
in
ft
Factory setting: m

9.2.14.2 Volume units [16]


Selects the unit for the "Volume" measurement.
This parameter is only visible when you have selected a volume characteristic curve using the
"Application" parameter.
Certain units are displayed differently on the display and over remote operation. (Page 102)

Setting range: Display (header line) Display (enumeration) Remote operation


Gal Ga gal
Gal [UK] IGa gal (UK)
l l l
hl hl hl
m3 m3 m3
in3 in3 in3
Ft3 Ft3 ft3
bu bu bu
Yd3 Yd3 yd3
bbl bbl bbl
bbl [US] Ubb bbl (US)
Nl Nl Nl
Nm3 Nm3 Nm3
SCF SCF SCF
Factory setting: m3

9.2.14.3 Volume flow units [16]


Selects the unit for the "Volume flow" measurement.
This parameter is only visible when you have selected a volume flow characteristic curve using
the "Application" parameter.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


124 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

Certain units are displayed differently on the display and over remote operation. (Page 102)

Setting range: Display (header line) Display (enumeration) Remote operation


m3/sec m3/S m³/s
m3/min m3/m m³/min
m3/h m3/h m³/h
m3/d m3/d m³/d
l/Sec l/S l/s
l/min l/m l/min
l/h l/h l/h
Ml/d Ml/d Ml/d
FT3/Sec Ft3/S ft³/s
Ft3/min Ft3/m ft³/min
Ft3/h Ft3/h ft³/h
Ft3/d Ft3/d ft³/d
SCF/min SCF/m SCF/min
SCF/h SCF/h SCF/h
Nl/h Nl/h Nl/h
Nm3/h Nm3/h Nm³/h
Gal[UK]/Sec IGa/S gal (UK)/s
Gal[UK]/min IGa/m gal (UK)/min
Gal [UK]/h IGal/h gal (UK)/h
Gal[UK]/d IGa/d gal (UK)/d
Gal/Sec Ga/S gal/s
Gal/min Ga/m gal/min
Gal/h Ga/h gal/h
Gal/d Ga/d gal/d
Mgal/d MGI/d Mgal/d
bbl/d bbl/d bbl/d
bbl/h bbl/h bbl/h
bbl/min bbl/m bbl/min
bbl/Sec bbl/S bbl/s
Factory setting: m³/s

9.2.14.4 Mass flow units [16]


Selects the unit for the mass flow measurement.
This parameter is only visible when you have selected a mass flow characteristic curve using
the "Application" parameter.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 125
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

Certain units are displayed differently on the display and over remote operation. (Page 102)

Setting range: Display (header line) Display (enumeration) Remote operation


KG/Sec KG/S kg/s
Gr/Sec G/S g/s
Gr/min G/m g/min
Gr/h G/h g/h
KG/min KG/m kg/min
KG/h KG/h kg/h
KG/d KG/d kg/d
t/min t/m t/min
t/h t/h t/h
t/d t/d t/d
lb/Sec lb/S lb/s
lb/min lb/m lb/min
lb/h lb/h lb/h
lb/d lb/d lb/d
ton/min sto/m ton/min
ton/h sto/h ton/h
ton/d sto/d ton/d
ton(UK)/h Lto/h ton (UK)/h
ton(UK)/d Lto/d ton (UK)/d
Factory setting: kg/s

9.2.15 Temperature units [17]


Selects the temperature unit for the "Sensor temperature" and "Electronics temperature"
measurements that are displayed in the measurement view.

Setting range: K
°C
°F
°R
Factory setting: °C

9.2.16 Lower scaling point [18]

Sets the lower range value for the scaling.


Depending on the application of the device, you set the lower scaling point as follows:

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


126 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

Level

Setting range: Freely selectable numeric value


Factory setting: 0m

Volume

Setting range: Freely selectable numeric value


Factory setting: 0 m3

Volume flow

Setting range: Freely selectable numeric value


Factory setting: 0 m3/s
Setting range: Freely selectable numeric value
Factory setting: 0

Mass flow

Setting range: Freely selectable numeric value


Factory setting: 0 kg/s
Setting range: Freely selectable numeric value
Factory setting: 0

Custom units

Setting range: Freely selectable numeric value


Factory setting: USER DEFINED (custom), or as specified in order

Note
Bidirectional volume and mass flow measurement
Select a lower scaling value that is symmetrical to the upper scaling value. Example:
● Upper scaling value: 1000 m3/s
● Lower scaling value: -1000 m3/s

9.2.16.1 Set lower scaling point

Procedure
1. Navigate to the parameter view.
Navigating in the views (Page 71)
2. Select the "Lower scaling point" parameter [18].
3. Use the button to confirm.
4. Set the lower scaling point.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 127
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

9.2.17 Upper scaling point [19]

Sets the upper range value for the scaling.


Depending on the application of the device, you set the upper scaling point as follows:

Level

Setting range: Freely selectable numeric value


Factory setting: 100 m

Volume

Setting range: Freely selectable numeric value


Factory setting: 1000 m3

Volume flow

Setting range: Freely selectable numeric value


Factory setting: 1000 m3/s

Mass flow

Setting range: Freely selectable numeric value


Factory setting: 1000 kg/s

Custom units

Setting range: Freely selectable numeric value


Factory setting: USER DEFINED (custom), or as specified in order

9.2.17.1 Set upper scaling point

Procedure
1. Navigate to the parameter view.
Navigating in the views (Page 71)
2. Select the "Upper scaling point" parameter [19].
3. Use the button to confirm.
4. Set the upper scaling point.

9.2.18 Low flow cut-off [20]


Sets the flow value for the low flow cut-off. The flow value is suppressed up to certain
percentage of the output value.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


128 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

The parameter is visible when you have selected the "Hold at 0, square root" (VSOFF or
MSOFF) characteristic curve using the "Application" parameter.

Setting range: 0% - 100%


Factory setting: 10%

See also
Volume and mass flow measurements (Page 111)

9.2.19 Vessel dimension A [21]


Sets the height of the vessel bottom for the following vessel shapes:
● Conical bottom vessel (CONIC)
● Parabolic bottom vessel (PARAB)
● Half sphere bottom vessel (HALF)
● Flat sloped bottom vessel (FLAT)
For a lying parabolic ends vessel (PARAE) the set value corresponds to the height of the end
piece.
You can find a figure with the different vessel shapes under "Volume measurement
(Page 114)".

Setting range: 0 to 100%


Factory setting: 0%

For the calculated volume to correspond to the actual vessel volume, set the parameters
Vessel dimension A and Vessel dimension L as follows:
● Vessel dimension L + 2 • Vessel dimension A = 100%.
Example: Vessel dimension L is 80% and vessel dimension A is 10%.

9.2.20 Vessel dimension L [22]


Sets the length of the bottom vessel for a lying parabolic ends vessel (PARAE).
You can find a figure with the different vessel shapes under "Volume measurement
(Page 114)".

Setting range: 0 to 100%


Factory setting: 0%

For the calculated volume to correspond to the actual vessel volume, set the parameters
Vessel dimension A and Vessel dimension L as follows:
● Vessel dimension L + 2 • Vessel dimension A = 100%.
Example: Vessel dimension L is 80% and vessel dimension A is 10%.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 129
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

9.2.21 Button lock [23]

Enables the button lock. You can continue operating the device via HART.

Setting range: ON Button lock enabled


OFF Button lock disabled
Factory setting: OFF

9.2.21.1 Enabling button lock

Procedure
1. Navigate into the parameter view.
Navigating in the views (Page 71)
2. In the parameter view, select the "Button lock" [23] parameter.
3. Press the button.
The "EDIT" symbol flashes.
4. Select ON with the or button.

5. Use the button to confirm.

Result
● The display automatically returns to the measurement view.
● The display automatically changes between the measured values every 12 seconds.
● The symbol for button lock "LL" and the measured value ID are displayed alternately.

Note
For a device without display, you activate the button lock using remote operation.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


130 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

9.2.21.2 Disabling button lock

Procedure
To disable the button lock, press and hold the button for 5 seconds.

Result
● The symbol for Button lock "LL" is hidden.
● You can operate the device using the buttons.

Note
For a device without display, you deactivate the button lock using remote operation.

9.2.22 Change user PIN [24]

Used to change the User PIN.

Setting range: 1 to 65535


Factory setting: 2457

Requirement
The "User PIN" parameter [27] is enabled.

Procedure
1. Navigate to the parameter view.
Navigating in the views (Page 71)
2. Select the parameter "Change user PIN" [24].

3. Press the button.


4. Enter the old user PIN.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 131
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

5. Enter the new user PIN with a value between 1 and 65535.
Changing parameter values (Page 77)

6. Use the button to confirm.


7. Repeat the new user PIN and use the button to confirm.

Result
● If both user PINs match, the "COMPL" message appears.
The user PIN has been successfully changed.
● If the two user PINs do not match, the "FAILD" message appears.
Then repeat the described procedure.

9.2.23 Recovery ID [25]

Shows the recovery ID.


If you have forgotten your user PIN, you will need a recovery ID. The "Recovery ID" parameter
shows a number that is necessary for restoring the user PIN.

Figure 9-2 Example

9.2.23.1 Display Recovery ID

Requirements
The "User PIN" parameter [27] is enabled.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


132 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

Procedure
1. Navigate to the parameter view.
Navigating in the views (Page 71)
2. Select the "Recovery ID" parameter [25].
This Recovery ID is displayed.

Result
Please contact the Technical Support (Page 247) with the displayed recovery ID and the serial
number of your device.
You can find the serial number of the device on the nameplate or via remote operation.
Siemens Technical Support will give you a PUK (PIN Unlock Key) that you use to reset the
user PIN to the factory setting 2457.

9.2.24 PIN recovery [26]

Used to reset the user PIN to the factory setting.


The user PIN is factory set to 2457 in the device.

9.2.24.1 Recovering the user PIN

Requirement
● You have received the PUK from Technical Support. (Page 132)
● The "User PIN" parameter [27] is enabled.

Procedure
1. In the parameter view, select the "PIN recovery" [26] parameter.

2. Press the button.


The cursor and the "EDIT" symbol flash.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 133
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

3. Enter the digits of the PUK:


– Use the or button to change.
– Use the button to confirm.
– Use the button to delete.
The complete PUK is shown on the top line of the display.

4. When the PUK is complete, use the button to confirm.

Result
● If you have entered the correct PUK, the message "NEW PIN - 2457" appears.
The user PIN has been reset to the factory setting 2457.
● If the PUK was not correctly entered, the message "FAILD" appears.
Then repeat the described procedure.

9.2.25 User PIN [27]

Used to enable or disable the user PIN.

Setting range: ON Enable user PIN


OFF Disable user PIN
Factory setting: User PIN disabled

When user PIN is enabled, the measured values and parameters are read-only.
● To change the parameters and use the device functions, the user PIN must be input.
The user PIN 2457 is factory preset in the device.

Note
Write protection is automatically enabled 10 minutes after the last button operation.
● Enter the user PIN.

9.2.25.1 Enable user PIN

Requirement
The User PIN is disabled.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


134 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

Procedure
1. Navigate into the parameter view.
Navigating in the views (Page 71)
2. Select the parameter "User PIN" [27].
3. Use the button to confirm.
The message "USER PIN ON" (User PIN enabled) appears for 2 seconds.

Result
The user PIN is enabled.

9.2.25.2 Disable user PIN

Requirement
The user PIN is enabled.

Procedure
1. Navigate into the parameter view.
Navigating in the views (Page 71)
2. Select the parameter "User PIN" [27].
3. Use the button to confirm.
4. Select YES with the or button.

5. Use the button to confirm.


The message "USER PIN OFF" appears for 2 seconds.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 135
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

Result
The User PIN is disabled.

9.2.26 Active device mode [28]


Shows the mode in which the device is operated.
The parameter is only visible for devices with Functional Safety.

Setting range: STD Functional Safety is disabled


FUNCT Validation of the safety-related parameters and/or the fail-
safe behavior is performed
SAFE Functional Safety is enabled
ERROR Safety critical device error
O/S Out of service mode, non-safe mode
Factory setting: STD

See also
Device mode (Page 157)

9.2.27 Functional Safety [29]


Enables Functional Safety.
The parameter is only visible for devices with Functional Safety.

See also
Functional Safety (Page 153)

9.2.28 Display test [30]


Used to check that numbers, texts and symbols appear correctly on the display.
● To start the display test, press the button and select "START".
When the display test is complete, the message "COMPL" appears.
● To cancel the display test, press the button.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


136 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

9.2.29 Loop test [31]

Sets a constant loop current for test purposes.


You have the option of selecting preset values or a user-defined value.

Setting range: 3.55 mA


4 mA
12 mA
20 mA
22.8 mA
USER User defined
Factory setting: 12 mA

9.2.29.1 Loop test with preset loop current value

Procedure
1. Navigate into the parameter view.
Navigating in the views (Page 71)
2. In the parameter view, select the "Loop test" parameter [31].
3. Use the button to confirm.

The loop test starts:


– The "EDIT" symbol flashes.
– The "Function check" symbol is displayed.
– The "Co" symbol (constant current mode) is displayed.
4. Change the preset value with the or button.
5. Use the button to confirm.
The loop test starts.
6. End the loop test with the button.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 137
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

9.2.29.2 Loop test with user defined loop current value

Procedure
1. Navigate into the parameter view.
Navigating in the views (Page 71)
2. In the parameter view, select the "Loop test" parameter [31].
3. Use the button to confirm.

The loop test starts:


– The "EDIT" symbol flashes.
– The "Function check" symbol is displayed.
– The "Co" symbol (constant current mode) is displayed.
4. Change to "USER" with the or button.
5. Use the button to confirm.
6. Set a value between 3.6 mA and 22.8 mA using the buttons or .
7. Use the button to confirm.
The loop test starts.
8. End the loop test with the button.

9.2.30 Start view [32]


Selects the value that is displayed as the first measured value in the measurement view.
For the selection to take effect, change from the parameter view to the measurement view or
restart the device.

Setting range: Edit view Measurement view


PRESS Pressure (P1)
STEMP Sensor temperature (P2)
ETEMP Electronics temperature (P3)
LEVEL Level (P4)
VOL Volume (P5)
VFLOW Volume flow (P6)
MFLOW Mass flow (P7)
USER Customized characteristic curve (P8)
% Percent of range (P9)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


138 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

LOOPC Loop current (PA)


CVOLT Terminal voltage (PB)
Factory setting: PRESS

Note
To have the process value for "Level", "Volume", "Mass flow", "Volume flow" or "Customized
characteristic curve" shown as the "Start view", first set the associated characteristic curve
using the "Application" (Page 106) parameter.

9.2.31 Pressure reference [33]


Used to adapt the display of the pressure unit to your application.

Setting range: NONE Not specified


GAUGE Gauge pressure
ABS Absolute pressure
Factory setting: NONE

See also
Pressure units [01] (Page 101)

9.2.32 Identify the device [34]


Enables or disables the device identification via HART.
When device identification is enabled, the device signals its identification data via HART.
With device identification enabled, the device responds to a request with the HART command
"Find device".

Setting range: ON Device identification enabled


OFF Device identification disabled
Factory setting: OFF

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 139
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

9.2.33 Reset [35]

Used to reset the following settings:

Setting range: Restore ordered configuration CUST


Reset to sensor calibration SENSR
Reset DAC trim to the factory setting DAC
Factory reset FACT

9.2.33.1 Reset to sensor calibration


Resets the zero point adjustment and sensor calibration to the factory setting.

9.2.33.2 Reset DAC trim to the factory setting


Resets the DAC trim (digital-to-analog converter trim) to the factory setting.
The DAC trim is used to calibrate the 4 mA and 20 mA end points of the analog output with
an external reference (e.g. current measurement device).
The DAC trim is available over remote operation.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


140 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Parameter assignment
9.2 Parameter assignment over device with display

9.2.33.3 Restore ordered configuration


With this function you return your device to its delivery state.
● The ordered configuration of the following parameters is restored:
– Pressure units
– Quick start
– Pressure reference
– Long tag (TAG)
– Short tag (TAG)
– Lower range value
– Upper range value
– Lower limit of the measuring range
– Upper limit of the measuring range
– Damping value
– Application and related values (e.g.: vessel shapes and application points)
– Fault current selection
– Lower fault current
– Upper fault current
– Lower saturation limit
– Upper saturation limit
– Custom units
● The parameters that you have not configured via the order are reset to the factory settings.

9.2.33.4 Restore factory settings


With this function you return your device to its factory setting.
The following settings are reset to the factory setting among other things:
● Sensor calibration
● DAC trim
● The defaults that you have configured in your order.
These defaults can then deviate from the ordered configuration. To restore the ordered
configuration, use the "Restore ordered configuration (Page 141)" parameter.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 141
Parameter assignment
9.3 Parameter assignment over remote operation

9.3 Parameter assignment over remote operation

9.3.1 Introduction

Introduction
This section describes the most important parameters and functions that are available
additionally over remote operation:
● "Quick Start" wizard
● Identification (TAG)
● Simulation
● Customized characteristic curve
● Sensor calibration
● Diagnostics functions
– Limit monitoring and event counter
– Trend log (not available on SITRANS P320)

9.3.2 Quick start


You use the "Quick start" wizard to configure your device in five steps for the required
application:
● Step 1: Identification
● Step 2: Application
● Step 3: Scaling
Note that you set the displayed pressure unit with the "Pressure units" (Page 102)
parameter and not with the wizard.
Set the unit of the selected application (e.g. volume, mass flow) also via the parameter
group "Settings > Current output > Scaling > Unit".
Step 4: Fault current
● Step 5: Summary
The summary provides an overview of the "old" and "new" parameters.
To store the parameters in SIMATIC PDM and transfer them to the device, click the "Apply"
button.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


142 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Parameter assignment
9.3 Parameter assignment over remote operation

9.3.3 Identification
Define the data that you need to identify your device under the "Identification" parameter group.
A distinction is made between data you can set yourself and values that are preset in the
factory. The default values are write-protected and cannot be changed by the user. The
corresponding allocation is set out below:

Designation Adjustable Preset Factory setting


Short tag X -
Long tag (TAG) X -
Description X -
Message X -
Installation date X - dd.mm.yyyy
Device
Manufacturer_id - X Siemens
Product name - X SITRANS P4201)
Article number - X e.g. 7MF0440-1GL01-5AF2-Z1)
Order option 1/ Order option 2 - X e.g. A01+C11+C12+C14+C20+E00+H01+Y01+Y15+Y211)
Serial number - X in accordance with the measuring cell selection/device manufac‐
ture
Final assembly number X -
Sensor serial number - X in accordance with the measuring cell selection/device manufac‐
ture
Hardware version - X in accordance with the measuring cell selection/device manufac‐
ture
Firmware version - X in accordance with the measuring cell selection/device manufac‐
ture
EDD version - X
Sensor serial number - X in accordance with the measuring cell selection/device manufac‐
ture
Sensor type - X in accordance with the measuring cell selection/device manufac‐
ture
Maximum measuring span - X in accordance with the measuring cell selection/device manufac‐
ture
1)
in accordance with the order

9.3.4 Simulation

You can use the device to simulate the following via remote operation (e.g. field communicator,
SIMATIC PDM):
● Input and output values
– Constant pressure values
– Ramp function
● Diagnostics

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 143
Parameter assignment
9.3 Parameter assignment over remote operation

NOTICE
Timeout of simulation
10 minutes after changing (editing) a simulation parameter (the "Simulation value" parameter
is the exception), the simulation is automatically disabled and the device returns to normal
measuring mode. When a timeout occurs, the "Simulation mode" parameter switches to
"Disabled" and the error code "Cb" is no longer shown on the display. (Device status
conditions are also reset in PDM, AMS, FDT and FC375/475.)

9.3.4.1 Simulate constant pressure values

Procedure
To simulate a constant pressure value via remote operation (e.g. SIMATIC PDM), follow these
steps:
1. For the "Simulation mode" parameter, set the "Enabled" option to simulate a constant
pressure value.
2. Select the pressure value ("Process value") to be simulated from the drop-down list under
the "Simulation selection" parameter.
3. For the "Simulation value" parameter, set the desired constant pressure value for the
simulation.
4. Set status to be simulated for the "PV status" parameter.
5. Click "Transfer" to start the simulation.
6. For the "Simulation mode" parameter, set the "Disabled" option to stop the simulation.

Result
The measured value is replaced by a constant simulation value. The simulation influences the
output signal.
The diagnostic ID "Cb" is displayed on the device.

Note
The simulated pressure value has a direct effect on the configured process value (e.g. volume
or flow rate) and thus on the current output dependent on it.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


144 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Parameter assignment
9.3 Parameter assignment over remote operation

9.3.4.2 Simulate ramp function

Procedure
To simulate a ramp function via remote operation (e.g. SIMATIC PDM), follow these steps:
1. For the "Simulation mode" parameter, set the "Ramp" option to simulate a changing
pressure value.
2. Select the pressure value ("Process value") to be simulated from the drop-down list under
the "Simulation selection" parameter.
3. For the "Simulation value" parameter, set the desired start value for the simulation.
4. Set status to be simulated for the "PV status" parameter.
5. Set the "Ramp end" parameter .
6. Set the "Ramp steps" parameter to define the number of steps in the ramp simulation.
7. Set the "Ramp duration" parameter to define the time interval (in seconds) for each step in
the simulation.
8. Click "Transfer" to start the simulation.
9. For the "Simulation mode" parameter, set the "Disabled" option to stop the simulation.

Note
The simulated pressure value has a direct effect on the configured process value (e.g. volume
or flow rate) and thus on the current output dependent on it.

9.3.4.3 Simulate diagnostics

Procedure
To simulate diagnostics via remote operation (e.g. SIMATIC PDM), follow these steps:
1. Open the "Device" menu in SIMATIC PDM and select "Simulation > Diagnostics".
2. To put the device into simulation mode, press the "Enable" button in the "Simulation
diagnostics" tab.
(Button switches between "Enable" and "Disable").
3. Select the diagnostics you want to simulate from the drop-down box of the "Diagnostics"
field.
4. Select "Action" for each selected diagnostic action to be simulated: "On" or "Off".
5. To start the simulation, click on the "Apply and transfer" button.
The diagnostic status of the simulation selected for each diagnostic is displayed in additional
tabs in the dialog box. The simulated diagnostics is indicated by a check mark in the check
box.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 145
Parameter assignment
9.3 Parameter assignment over remote operation

End diagnostics simulation


You close the simulation in the "Diagnostics simulation" tab:
● To disable a specific diagnostic action, click "Off" (under the "Action" field).
● To end the diagnostics simulation, click on the "Disable" button.

NOTICE
The device display shows a simulated diagnostic status and does not react to diagnostic
events of normal operation.
When diagnostics simulation is enabled, diagnostic events of normal operation are neither
recorded nor evaluated.
When diagnostics simulation is enabled, the device display shows the currently most critical
simulated diagnostic status.
● Stop diagnostics simulation immediately after use as follows:
– Click "Disable" in the "Diagnostics simulation" tab before you close the "Diagnostics"
dialog.
– Alternatively, you can restart the device.

9.3.5 Customized characteristic curve

9.3.5.1 Introduction
For special applications, a customized characteristic curve is available.
This application is used, for example, for volume measurement in vessels with unusual shapes.
You define the relationship between inlet pressure and outlet current according to your user-
specific requirements.
You have up to 32 breakpoints available for this, which you enter using the engineering system
and display graphically.

Example
For measurement with the customized characteristic curve, you set the following values, for
example:

Damping value: 2.0 s


Lower range value: 0 bar
Upper range value: 10 bar
Application: Custom (CUSTM)
Unit: Cans
Lower scaling point: 0 cans
Upper scaling point: 250 cans

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


146 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Parameter assignment
9.3 Parameter assignment over remote operation

x values: 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%


y values: 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%

9.3.5.2 "Custom units" parameter


Selects a custom unit.
The selected unit is displayed in the measurement view (Page 73).

Setting range: Up to 12 characters


Factory setting: 0 or as specified in order

This parameter is only visible when you have selected a custom characteristic curve using the
"Application" parameter.

9.3.5.3 Set customized characteristic curve

Requirement
● You have set the "Customized characteristic curve" application.
● You have set a custom unit.
● You have set the lower scaling point and the upper scaling point.

Procedure
1. Select the "Customized characteristic curve" menu.
2. Read the data from the device.
3. Enter the desired number of breakpoints.
You can enter a minimum of two and up to 32 breakpoints.
4. Enter the x values and y values.
Note
The x values must increase monotonically. Otherwise, the x values are not accepted by
the device.
The characteristic curve is displayed as diagram.
The x values are shown as pressure value or as percentage of the set pressure range.
The y values are displayed in the user-specific unit or as a percentage of the configured
user-specific range.
5. Transfer the characteristic to the device.

Result
The output current now follows the set characteristic.
Values below the first breakpoint or above the last breakpoint are extrapolated.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 147
Parameter assignment
9.3 Parameter assignment over remote operation

See also
Application [05] (Page 106)

9.3.6 Sensor calibration

You use the sensor trim to set the characteristic curve of the device at two trim points. The
results are then correct measured values at the sensor trim points.
The sensor trim points can be selected as any points within the nominal range.
Devices that are not turned down prior to delivery are trimmed at 0 bar and the high limit of
the nominal range.
Devices that are turned down prior to delivery are trimmed at the low and high limits of the set
measuring range.

Examples
● For a particular device that is not turned down (e.g. 63 bar), the typical measured value is
50 bar. To attain the highest possible accuracy for this value, set the upper sensor trim at
50 bar.
● A 63-bar pressure transmitter is turned down to 4 to 7 bar. You can attain the highest
possible accuracy by selecting 4 bar for the low trim point and 7 bar for the high trim point.
● A 250-mbar absolute pressure transmitter shows 25 mbar at 20 mbar. A reference pressure
of 20 mbar is available. To correct the zero point, perform a sensor trim at the lower trim
point with 20 mbar.
Note
Use a test device whose accuracy is at least three times as high as the accuracy of the
pressure transmitter.

Sensor trim at the lower trim point


1. Apply the pressure for the lower sensor trim at the device.
2. Use the "Apply values" menu to enter the pressure value that you have created and assign
the pressure value to the device.
The device calibrates to your value.
The device carries out an offset correction of the characteristic curve.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


148 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Parameter assignment
9.3 Parameter assignment over remote operation

Sensor trim at the upper trim point


1. Apply the pressure for the upper sensor trim at the device.
The upper trim point needs to be greater than the lower trim point.
2. Use the "Apply values" menu to enter the pressure value that you have created and assign
the pressure value to the device.
The device calibrates to your value.
The slope of the characteristic curve is corrected.
The lower sensor trim point is not affected by this.

Result

 $% 3DUDOOHOVKLIW
0HDVXUHG
SUHVVXUHS %  %& ,QFOLQHFKDQJH

 &

/RZHU 8SSHU 'HIDXOWSUHVVXUH


WULPSRLQW WULPSRLQW

A Original characteristic
B Characteristic curve after lower sensor trim
C Characteristic curve after upper sensor trim

See also
Apply lower range value [08]/Apply upper range value [09] (Page 118)

9.3.7 Diagnostics functions

9.3.7.1 Limit monitoring and event counter


Used to monitor selected process values, count associated events based on configured limits
and triggers, acknowledge and reset alarms and warnings.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 149
Parameter assignment
9.3 Parameter assignment over remote operation

Configuring variables for monitoring


Configure a process value for each "Limit monitoring" tab. Select the process value to be
monitored in the "Monitored value" drop-down list. Enter the values for upper limit, lower limit
and hysteresis that trigger an event.

Limits
Each process value (monitored value) is assigned limits. The following limit parameters are
available:
● Upper limit
● Lower limit
● Hysteresis

Hysteresis
The hysteresis works as follows:

/LPLWVZLWKK\ᚔHUHVLV $ %
0RQLWRUHGYDOXH   

8SSHUOLPLW
+\ᚔHUHVLV

+\ᚔHUHVLV
/RZHUOLPLW
7LPH

  

/LPLWVZLWKRXWK\ᚔHUHVLV
& '
0RQLWRUHGYDOXH  

8SSHUOLPLW

/RZHUOLPLW
7LPH

 

A:Upper limit with hysteresis


An overrun event is counted when the process value rises above the upper limit (1). The next
overrun event is counted when the process value falls below the lower limit minus hysteresis
(2), and then rises above the upper limit (3).
When hysteresis is enabled (value not equal to zero entered), two events are counted within
the time period specified by 'A'.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


150 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Parameter assignment
9.3 Parameter assignment over remote operation

B:Lower limit with hysteresis


An underrun event is counted when the process value falls below the lower limit (1). The next
underrun event is counted when the process value first rises above the lower limit plus
hysteresis (2), and then falls below the lower limit (3).
C:Lower limit without hysteresis
An underrun event is counted when the process value falls below the lower limit (1). The next
underrun event is counted when the process value rises above the lower limit (2) by a given
value (since the hysteresis is set to zero), and then falls below the lower limit (2).
When hysteresis is disabled (no value entered), three events are counted within the period
specified by 'C'.
D:Upper limit without hysteresis
An overrun event is counted when the process value rises above the upper limit (1). The next
overrun event is counted when the process value falls below the lower limit (2) by a given value
(since the hysteresis is set to zero), and then rises above the upper limit (2).
Limit monitoring not requiring acknowledgment
If limit monitoring display is enabled, a "process value alarm" is set for each limit violation (high
or low violation).
This process value alarm is reset when the monitored process value is again within the limits.
It is not necessary to acknowledge the process value alarm.
Limit monitoring requiring acknowledgment with event counter
With this type of monitoring, the configured diagnostics is only triggered after the specified
number of limit violations has been reached (e.g. maintenance required).
This diagnostic message must be acknowledged. During acknowledgment, the event counters
of the monitored process value and the diagnostic messages are reset.

Events and actions


If the process value rises above the upper limit (overrun) or falls below the lower limit
(underrun), an event is counted with an adjustment by any hysteresis.
Process alarms and warnings are displayed as symbols for the status in the device status
dialog in the engineering system and on the device screen.
All alarms and warnings that have been triggered remain pending until the event counter is
reset. Disabling the action means that no new alarms or warnings are triggered for the
configured limits although the counter remains in operation.

Actions and fail-safe mode


Process alarms can trigger fail-safe behavior at the signal output, while process warnings only
serve as information available via local operation and the engineering system. Process values
set the signal output to fail-safe mode if:
– Specific errors occur (the mA output is set to fail-safe mode). (See Diagnostic messages
(Page 184).)
– A maintenance alarm occurs at a process value selected at the output.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 151
Parameter assignment
9.3 Parameter assignment over remote operation

Enable monitoring
Once the monitored variable is configured, you must ensure that the limit monitoring is set to
Enabled and then select Apply and transfer to the device. To monitor a different process value,
repeat the steps in a new tab page for limit monitoring.

Displaying and resetting event counters


If process alarms or warnings are triggered during device operation, return to this dialog and
select Reset and acknowledge. The event counter is reset and process alarms and warnings
are acknowledged and deleted.

9.3.7.2 Trend log

Requirement
You have the SITRANS P420 product version.

Set trend log


Trend logging can be configured in SIMATIC PDM via the menu command "Device > Trend
log settings".
1. Activate logging by specifying a number of values to be logged in the "Number of logging
values" parameter.
2. In the "Number of logged points" parameter, enter the number of points to be logged.
3. In the "Logging interval" parameter, specify the interval in seconds between the log entries.
4. Use the "Logging behavior" parameter to define the buffer behavior when the log is full.
5. In the parameters "Logging value 1" and "Logging value 2", define the process values to
be logged.
6. Click on the "Transfer" button to write the log settings to the device.
You can view the trend log via the menu command "Diagnostics > Trend log".

Show trend log


The PV and SV (set in the "PV selector" and "SV selector" parameters) are recorded at
specified intervals and the trend log displays up to 300 data points since the last power-on.
The number of points already recorded and the start time are displayed.
Click on the "Read" button to update the log. A dialog box is displayed in which you can specify
the number of points to be read, the point density and the start time for reading. (An example
for setting the point density: If the point density is set to 2, every second value is displayed.)
When you have made all the settings, click on the "Transfer" button.
To display the trend lines, select the menu command "View > Process values" in the "Trend"
tab.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


152 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Functional Safety 10
Introduction
This section includes the required additional information for parameter assignment,
commissioning and maintenance of the device in a safety-instrumented system.

10.1 Safety concept


The device was developed in accordance with the Safety Integrity Level (SIL), which is defined
as a relative level of risk reduction offered by a safety function.
The individual device has a hardware fault tolerance of 0 (HFT = 0) and a systematic suitability
of 3. The device is classified as Type B device.
● The device meets the requirements of SIL 2 in single-channel safety-related systems.
● The device meets the requirements of SIL 3 in two-channel safety-related systems, when
a comparison function for checking the output of the two redundant devices comprising a
redundant system is implemented.

10.1.1 Random and systematic errors


Random errors can occur at any time. An example is an electronic circuit that is faulty
immediately.
Systematic errors occur under specific conditions and are reproducible, if the same conditions
arise again. An example is a software error that occurs under certain conditions.
There are random and systematic errors in hardware, but only systematic errors in software.

Note
Limitations in redundant systems
Redundancy significantly reduces the probability of a failure of the fail-safe behavior due to a
random error but not the probability of systematic errors.

10.1.2 SIL-compliant product version


Information on specific versions that are permitted for use in safety-related systems according
to IEC 61508 can be found in the manufacturer's declaration of conformity for the device (SIL
declaration of conformity, Functional Safety according to IEC 61508).

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 153
Functional Safety
10.1 Safety concept

See also
Certificates (Page 248)
General functional safety (http://www.siemens.com/safety)
Functional safety in process instrumentation (http://www.siemens.com/SIL)

10.1.3 Safety function

The fail-safe behavior of the device is the pressure measurement or the measurement of
certain process values which can be calculated from the pressure value.
The 4 to 20 mA analog output can be used as part of a safety instrumented function (SIF).
Ensure that you have only connected one device per channel and that the device is not in
multidrop mode.
Besides the application-specific measuring errors under default reference conditions, an
additional safety accuracy of ± 2% of the maximum measuring range must be added:
Total tolerance (fail-safe behavior) = ± [application-specific measurement error + 2 % safety
accuracy].

Example
A silo is to be securely monitored to check that the level does not exceed 10 meters.
Application-specific measurement error: 0.1%
Safety accuracy: 2.0%
Total tolerance: 2.1%
2.1% of 10 meters is 21 centimeters. When process monitoring is set to 9.79 meters, safe
shutdown is guaranteed even in the event of a random individual error within the safety
accuracy.

Note
Use of remote seals
If remote seals are used, the application-specific measurement error is the product of the
pressure transmitter and remote seal measurement errors.

Safety allowance
The diagnostics function reacts within 2 seconds after detection of an error.

Note
For use outside the standard reference conditions, contact Siemens to define an additional
safety accuracy.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


154 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Functional Safety
10.1 Safety concept

See also
Remote seal (Page 37)

Safety-instrumented system in single-channel operation (SIL 2)

Transmitter Automation system Final controlling

P$ P$

Figure 10-1 Safety-instrumented system in single-channel operation

The combination of pressure transmitter, automation system and final controlling element
forms a safety-instrumented system that performs fail-safe behavior. The focus of this
description is on the pressure transmitter. For information on requirements for the automation
system or final controlling element, please refer to the corresponding standards.
The pressure transmitter generates a process-related measured value that is transferred to
the automation system. The automation system monitors this measured value. If the measured
value violates the high or low limit, the automation system generates a shutdown signal for the
connected final controlling element, which switches the corresponding valve to the specified
safety position.
Only one SITRANS P device is required for single-channel operation for SIL 2.

Safety-instrumented system in multi-channel operation (SIL 3)

Transmitter Automation system Final controlling elements

P$ P$

Figure 10-2 Safety-instrumented system in multi-channel operation

The combination of transmitter, automation system and final controlling element forms a safety-
instrumented system that performs a safety function. The emphasis of this description is on
the transmitter. For information on requirements for the automation system or final controlling
element, please refer to the corresponding standards.
The transmitter generates process-related measured values that are transferred to the
automation system. The automation system monitors these measured values. In the event of
a fault, the automation system generates shutdown signals for connected final controlling
elements that set the associated valve to the defined safety position. Faults are:
● Violations of the preset high or low limits
● Deviations between the two measured values

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 155
Functional Safety
10.1 Safety concept

The automation system program must monitor the measured values of both SITRANS
P devices. As soon as the measured values differ by e.g. 2% or more, the system must be
brought into the safe state and the fault must be located.
Two SITRANS P devices are required for multi-channel operation for SIL 3. Operation with
one device is not permitted.

Note
Switching-off of system at high monitoring accuracy
The two transmitters are connected to the process at different positions. Actual differences in
pressure ≥ the total tolerance (safety function) can occur when the process is started up or if
there are other pressure variations. A difference in pressure ≥ the total tolerance (safety
function) will shut down the system.
● Match the monitoring accuracy of the automation system to the process.
● Mount the two transmitters exposed to equal conditions.

10.1.3.1 Device statuses


The following table provides a definition of the states of the device:

Device status Description Error class


Normal mode (4-20 mA) The safe current output outputs -
the measured value within the
defined safety accuracy.
Detected failure (safe state) The safe current output is (λDD) Rate of dangerous detec‐
≤ 3.6 mA or ≥ 21 mA (specified ted errors
as failure signal).
Dangerous state A dangerous state exists when a (λDU) Rate of dangerous undetec‐
current output is in the range ted errors
4-20 mA and deviates from the
correct process value by more
than the specified safety accura‐
cy (Page 154) for more than 2
seconds.

10.1.3.2 Safety parameters


You can find the safety parameters in the certificate for functional safety in accordance with
IEC 61508.

Note
Useful lifetime
Constant failure rates are assumed for the calculation of PFD/SFF. This assumption is valid
for environmental conditions that are typical for an industrial environment, corresponding to
IEC 60654-1 class C (weatherproof locations) with an average long-term temperature of 40°C.
After 15 years, however, the failure rates may increase.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


156 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Functional Safety
10.1 Safety concept

See also
Certificates (Page 248)

10.1.4 Operating modes of the device


The device can be operated as follows:
● "Functional Safety disabled" is used for operation in non-safety-related applications.
● "Functional Safety enabled" is used for operation in safety-related applications.

See also
Enabling Functional Safety (Page 160)

10.1.5 Device mode

When Functional Safety is disabled, the following device modes are displayed via the display
or remote operation:

Device mode Description Current output value Safe current output


Functional Safety disa‐ Used for operation in Operating signal No
bled non-safety-related ap‐ (4 to 20 mA)
plications.
The safety-related pa‐
rameters of the device
are set.
The safety-relevant pa‐
rameters and the fail-
safe behavior are vali‐
dated.
Out of service, non-safe The device is out of Failure signal No
mode service (e.g. a firmware (≤ 3.6 mA or ≥ 21 mA)
update is running)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 157
Functional Safety
10.1 Safety concept

When Functional Safety is enabled, the following device modes are displayed via the display
or remote operation:

Device mode Description Current output value Safe current output


Functional Safety ena‐ Ensures safe measure‐ Operating signal Yes
bled ment output at the cur‐ (4 to 20 mA)
rent output.
Safety-related error The system has detec‐ Failure signal Yes
ted a safety-critical error (≤ 3.6 mA or ≥ 21 mA)
in "Functional Safety en‐
abled" device mode.
The errors are listed in
the error list of the de‐
vice. Once the errors
have been eliminated,
the device can only be
put back into safe oper‐
ation by performing the
safety validation.

You can find the display of the device modes in the section Active device mode [28]
(Page 136)

See also
Safety-related parameters (Page 159)
Enabling Functional Safety (Page 160)

10.1.5.1 Validation
In "Functional Safety disabled" device mode, you have the option of making the following
validations before you enable Functional Safety:
● Validation of safety-related parameters.
This validation ensures that all safety-related parameters are correctly transferred to the
device.
● Validation of the safety function (function test).

See also
Enabling Functional Safety (Page 160)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


158 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Functional Safety
10.1 Safety concept

10.1.5.2 Safety-related parameters


The following parameters are the safety-related parameters of the device:

Parameter ID Parameter name on Meaning


the display
S1 PV SELECT Pressure is the primary variable. The parameter cannot be
changed.
S2 DAMPING Damping value [04] (Page 105)
S3 UPPER RANGE Set upper range value parameter [03] (Page 104)
S4 LOWER RANGE Set lower range value parameter [02] (Page 104)
S5 APPLICATION Application [05] (Page 106)

To set these parameters, change the device mode to "Functional Safety disabled".

10.1.5.3 Device mode "Functional Safety enabled"


In "Functional Safety enabled" device mode, an internal diagnostics process of the device
performs the following safety-related checks:
● Sensor breakage monitoring
● Continuous testing of execution and logic behavior of CPU, analog-to-digital converter and
memory
● Temperature monitoring
● Pressure monitoring
● Integrity of safety-related parameters
● Plausibility check of current output
When a safety-related critical error is detected in the device, the current output signal
corresponds to the fault current (≤ 3.55 mA) and is independent of the settings of the following
parameters:
Select fault current [10] (Page 120),
Lower fault current [11] (Page 120),
Upper fault current [12] (Page 121),
Lower saturation limit [13] (Page 121),
Upper saturation limit [14] (Page 122)

Note
As long as the device is in the "Functional Safety enabled" device mode, all parameters are
protected against changes.
● To change the parameters, disable Functional Security.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 159
Functional Safety
10.2 Enabling Functional Safety

10.2 Enabling Functional Safety


You enable or disable Functional Safety with the "Functional Safety" wizard.
The wizard is available via the device with a display and via remote operation (e.g. with the
"Device > Functional Safety" menu command in SIMATIC PDM).
For a device without display, enable Functional Security via remote operation.
You have the following options for enabling Functional Safety:
1. Enable Functional Safety after validation of safety-related parameters and fail-safe
behavior (recommended).
2. Enabling Functional Safety after validation of safety-related parameters and without
validation of fail-safe behavior (recommended).
3. Enable Functional Safety without validation.

See also
Checklist for Functional Safety (Page 248)

10.2.1 Enabling Functional Safety over device with display

Requirement
● You have checked the settings of the safety-related parameters.
Safety-related parameters (Page 159)
Note
The main line of the display has a measured value display with a maximum of five digits.
● To completely display the measured values for upper range value [S3] and lower range
value [S4] by means of the maximum five digits available, set the pressure units
(Page 102)correspondingly.

● You have selected one of the following characteristic curves using the "Application"
parameter [05]:
– Linear, proportional to pressure (PRESS).
– Linear, proportional to level (LEVEL).
– Proportional to flow rate, two-step linear up to the application point (VSLN2 or MSLN2).
● You have enabled the "User PIN" parameter [27].
The user PIN you use is not the preset user PIN (2457).

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


160 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Functional Safety
10.2 Enabling Functional Safety

Procedure
1. Navigate into the parameter view.
Navigating in the views (Page 71)
2. Select the parameter "Functional Safety" [29].
3. To start the wizard, enter the user PIN if needed.
4. Use the button to confirm.
The display test runs automatically.
5. Check that the numbers, texts and symbols are displayed correctly.
6. Once the display test is complete, start the validation of the safety-related parameters and
the fail-safe behavior.
When you select "ENABL", you enable Functional Safety directly without validation of the
safety-related parameters and the fail-safe behavior.

Validating safety-related parameters


1. Select "VALID".

2. Use the button to confirm.


3. Navigate to the safety-related parameters with the button.
To correct the safety-related parameters, exit the wizard with the button. Use the
button to confirm.
Note
Write protection via user PIN is automatically enabled 10 minutes after the last button
operation. The wizard therefore aborts and the validation of the safety-related parameters
is lost.
● To start the wizard again, enter the user PIN.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 161
Functional Safety
10.2 Enabling Functional Safety

4. To complete validation of the safety-related parameters, confirm with YES.

5. To validate the fail-safe behavior, start the function test with "START".
When you select "SKIP", you skip the function test and enable Functional Safety directly
without validation of the fail-safe behavior.

Validate fail-safe behavior


1. Check the correct execution of the fail-safe behavior in which the device is used.
2. In the parameter view, select the "Functional Safety" parameter [29].
3. To continue with the wizard, enter the user PIN if needed.
4. Select "START".

5. Use the button to confirm.

6. When you have successfully validated the fail-safe behavior, restart the wizard and select
"PASSD".

The message "SAFETY MODE ON" (Functional Safety enabled) appears.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


162 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Functional Safety
10.2 Enabling Functional Safety

Result
The device is in the "Functional Safety enabled" device mode.

● The "SIL" symbol is displayed.


● The "DSABL" command appears (Disable Functional Safety).
● All parameters are protected against changes.
● When a safety-related error is detected on the device, the device changes to "Safety critical
error" device mode (Page 168).

See also
Troubleshooting Functional Security (Page 190)

10.2.2 Enabling Functional Safety over remote operation

Requirement
● You have documented the device identification:
– During installation, you have read and documented the product name and the serial
number on the rating plate of the device.
– You have defined and documented a long tag (Page 143).
● You have checked the settings of the safety-related parameters.
Safety-related parameters (Page 159)
● You have selected one of the following characteristic curves using the "Application"
parameter [05]:
– Linear, proportional to pressure
– Linear, proportional to level
– Volume flow: two step linear, square root.
– Mass flow: two step linear, square root.
● You have enabled the "User PIN" parameter [27].
The user PIN you use is not the preset user PIN (2457).

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 163
Functional Safety
10.2 Enabling Functional Safety

Procedure
1. Select the menu command "Functional Safety".
2. Enter the user PIN.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


164 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Functional Safety
10.2 Enabling Functional Safety

3. Validate the following settings:


– Identification data of your device: Long tag, product name, serial number.
– Settings of the safety-related parameters
To change the settings, exit the wizard with "Cancel".

4. Write down the fingerprint.


Whenever you start the validation, the device generates a fingerprint. By comparing the
fingerprint, you determine whether or not the device and the safety-related parameters have
changed erroneously during activation of the functional safety.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 165
Functional Safety
10.2 Enabling Functional Safety

5. To confirm the validation, enter the validation key.

6. To validate the fail-safe behavior, start the function test.


The device changes to the "Safety validation" device mode.

7. Confirm with "OK".

Validate fail-safe behavior


1. Check the correct execution of the fail-safe behavior in which the device is used.
2. Select the "Functional Safety" wizard.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


166 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Functional Safety
10.2 Enabling Functional Safety

3. Enter the user PIN.

4. Validate the identification data of your device.


5. Check that the displayed fingerprint matches the fingerprint you have written down.
6. Confirm the successful function test.

Result
The device is in the "Functional Safety enabled" device mode.

● All parameters are protected against changes.


● When a safety-related error is detected on the device, the device changes to "Safety critical
error" device mode (Page 168).

Note
The system shows unexpected data or behaves differently than described in this procedure.
● Repeat the entire procedure.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 167
Functional Safety
10.3 Acknowledging safety-related errors

10.3 Acknowledging safety-related errors

10.3.1 "Safety critical error" device mode


Introduction
When a safety-related error is detected on the device, the current output signal corresponds
to the fault current and the diagnostic message is displayed.

Figure 10-3 Parameter view of the display

Acknowledge the safety-related error with the "Functional Safety" parameter [29] via local
operation or via the menu command "Functional Safety" through remote operation.
(Page 169)
The device then restarts and returns to the "Functional Safety disabled" device mode.

Note
The system shows unexpected data or behaves differently than described in this procedure.
● Repeat the entire procedure.

Note
Damaged device
● Replace the device.

See also
Select fault current [10] (Page 120)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


168 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Functional Safety
10.3 Acknowledging safety-related errors

10.3.2 Acknowledging safety-related errors via remote operation

Procedure
1. Select the menu command "Functional Safety".
2. Enter the user PIN.

3. Validate the identification data of your device: Long tag, product name and serial number.

4. To acknowledge the safety-related error, click on "Acknowledge".

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 169
Functional Safety
10.4 Disabling Functional Safety over device with display

5. Validate the identification data of your device again: Long tag, product name and serial
number.

6. Click "Ok".
Functional Safety is disabled.
The device restarts automatically.

Result
● The safety-related error is acknowledged.
● The device returns to the "Functional Safety disabled" device mode.

Note
The system shows unexpected data or behaves differently than described in this procedure.
● Repeat the entire procedure.

10.4 Disabling Functional Safety over device with display

Requirement
The device is in the "Functional Safety enabled" device mode.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


170 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Functional Safety
10.5 Disabling Functional Safety over remote operation

Procedure
1. Navigate into the parameter view.
Navigating in the views (Page 71)
2. Select the parameter "Functional Safety" [29].
3. Enter the user PIN.
The wizard starts.
4. Select YES immediately and confirm wit the button.

Result
The device switches to "Functional Safety disabled" device mode.

Note
If Functional Safety remains enabled, repeat the procedure described above without any
interruptions.

10.5 Disabling Functional Safety over remote operation

Requirement
The device is in the "Functional Safety enabled" device mode.

Procedure
1. Select the menu command "Functional Safety".
2. Enter the user PIN.
3. Validate the identification data of your device: Long tag, product name and serial number.
4. Confirm with "Ok" that you want to disable Functional Safety.
5. Validate the identification data of your device again: Long tag, product name and serial
number.
6. Confirm with "OK".

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 171
Functional Safety
10.6 Proof test

Result
The device is in the "Functional Safety disabled" device mode.

Note
The system shows unexpected data or behaves differently than described in this procedure.
● Repeat the entire procedure.

10.6 Proof test


Proof tests can detect errors in the device that are not detected by the integrated diagnostics
of the device.
Proof tests performed at regular intervals uncover undetected errors that can otherwise cause
safety-related functions to function not as intended.
The interval between two proof tests is dependent on the safety-related system, based on the
combined calculations of failure rates for the system.

10.6.1 Intervals and rules for proof test


To ensure reliable operation of the fail-safe behavior, perform the following proof tests at the
following intervals:

All devices
Read the information on maintenance intervals and checking the seals and cable glands in
the section Maintenance and repair work (Page 177).

Absolute pressure devices


Set the zero point every 5 years for the following variants:

Measuring cell Absolute pressure from the rela‐ Absolute pressure from the dif‐
tive pressure/absolute pressure ferential pressure series
series with front-flush diaphragm
250 mbar a/25 kPa a/100 H2O 7MF0.2. - .F ... - .... 7MF0.3. - .G ... - ....
1300 mbar a/130 kPa a/525 H2O 7MF0.2. - .L ... - .... 7MF0.3. - .L ... - ....
5000 mbar a/500 kPa a/72.5 psi a 7MF0.2. - .P ... - .... 7MF0.3. - .P ... - ....
30 bar a/3 MPa a/435 psi a 7MF0.2. - .R ... - .... 7MF0.3. - .R ... - ....

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


172 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Functional Safety
10.7 Repair and service

You can find information on how to set the zero point for absolute pressure in section Adjusting
zero point (absolute pressure) (Page 117)

Note
To set the zero point, first disable Functional Safety.

10.6.2 Documenting a proof test


Documentation of the results of the proof test must be part of the safety management system
of the installation. Errors that are of critical importance for Functional Safety must be reported
to Siemens Technical Support (Page 247).

10.7 Repair and service

NOTICE
Repair and service
Repair and service work may only be performed by personnel authorized by Siemens.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 173
Functional Safety
10.7 Repair and service

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


174 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Service and maintenance 11
11.1 Basic safety instructions

WARNING
Use of a computer in a hazardous area
If the interface to the computer is used in the hazardous area, there is a risk of explosion.
● Ensure that the atmosphere is explosion-free (hot work permit).

WARNING
Dust layers above 5 mm
Risk of explosion in hazardous areas. Device may overheat due to dust build up.
● Remove dust layers in excess of 5 mm.

CAUTION
Releasing button lock
Improper modification of parameters could influence process safety.
● Make sure that only authorized personnel may cancel the button locking of devices for
safety-related applications.

NOTICE
Penetration of moisture into the device
Device damage.
● Make sure when carrying out cleaning and maintenance work that no moisture penetrates
the inside of the device.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 175
Service and maintenance
11.2 Cleaning

11.2 Cleaning

11.2.1 Cleaning the enclosure

Cleaning the enclosure


● Clean the outside of the enclosure with the inscriptions and the display window using a
cloth moistened with water or a mild detergent.
● Do not use any aggressive cleansing agents or solvents, e.g. acetone. Plastic parts or the
painted surface could be damaged. The inscriptions could become unreadable.

WARNING
Electrostatic charge
Risk of explosion in hazardous areas if electrostatic charges develop, for example, when
cleaning plastic surfaces with a dry cloth.
● Prevent electrostatic charging in hazardous areas.

11.2.2 Servicing the remote seal measuring system


The remote seal measuring system usually does not need servicing.
If the mediums are contaminated, viscous or crystallized, it could be necessary to clean the
diaphragm from time to time. Use only a suitable solvent to remove the deposits from the
diaphragm. Do not use corrosive cleaning agents. Prevent the diaphragm from getting
damaged due to sharp-edged tools.

NOTICE
Improper cleaning of diaphragm
Device damage. The diaphragm can be damaged.
● Do not use sharp or hard objects to clean the diaphragm.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


176 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Service and maintenance
11.3 Maintenance and repair work

11.3 Maintenance and repair work

CAUTION
Hot surfaces
Risk of burns during maintenance work on parts having surface temperatures exceeding
70 °C (158 °F).
● Take corresponding protective measures, for example by wearing protective gloves.
● After carrying out maintenance, remount touch protection measures.

11.3.1 Defining the maintenance interval

WARNING
No maintenance interval has been defined
Device failure, device damage, and risk of injury.
● Define a maintenance interval for recurring tests depending on the use of the device and
your own experience.
● The maintenance interval will vary from site to site depending on corrosion resistance.

WARNING
Maintenance during continued operation in a hazardous area
There is a risk of explosion when carrying out repairs and maintenance on the device in a
hazardous area.
● Isolate the device from power.
- or -
● Ensure that the atmosphere is explosion-free (hot work permit).

WARNING
Impermissible accessories and spare parts
Risk of explosion in areas subject to explosion hazard.
● Only use original accessories or original spare parts.
● Observe all relevant installation and safety instructions described in the instructions for
the device or enclosed with the accessory or spare part.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 177
Service and maintenance
11.3 Maintenance and repair work

WARNING
Hot, toxic or corrosive process media
Risk of injury during maintenance work.
When working on the process connection, hot, toxic or corrosive process media could be
released.
● As long as the device is under pressure, do not loosen process connections and do not
remove any parts that are pressurized.
● Before opening or removing the device ensure that process media cannot be released.

WARNING
Improper connection after maintenance
Risk of explosion in areas subject to explosion hazard.
● Connect the device correctly after maintenance.
● Close the device after maintenance work.
Refer to Technical data (Page 191).

11.3.2 Checking the gaskets

Inspect the seals at regular intervals

Note
Incorrect seal changes
Incorrect measured values will be displayed. Changing the seals in a process flange of a
differential pressure measuring cell can alter the start-of-scale value.
● Changing seals in devices with differential pressure measuring cells may only be carried
out by personnel authorized by Siemens.

Note
Using the wrong seals
Using the wrong seals with flush-mounted process connections can cause measuring errors
and/or damage the diaphragm.
● Always use seals which comply with the process connection standards or are
recommended by Siemens.

1. Clean the enclosure and seals.


2. Check the enclosure and the seals for cracks and damage.
3. If necessary, lubricate the seals or replace them.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


178 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Service and maintenance
11.3 Maintenance and repair work

11.3.3 Check cable glands


● Check the tightness of the cable glands at regular intervals.
● Tighten the cable glands if necessary.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 179
Service and maintenance
11.5 Disposal

11.4 Return procedure


Enclose the bill of lading, return document and decontamination certificate in a clear plastic
pouch and attach it firmly to the outside of the packaging.

Required forms
● Delivery note
● Return document (http://www.siemens.com/processinstrumentation/returngoodsnote)
with the following information:
– Product (item description)
– Number of returned devices/replacement parts
– Reason for returning the item(s)
● Decontamination declaration (http://www.siemens.com/sc/declarationofdecontamination)
With this declaration you warrant "that the device/replacement part has been carefully
cleaned and is free of residues. The device/replacement part does not pose a hazard for
humans and the environment."
If the returned device/replacement part has come into contact with poisonous, corrosive,
flammable or water-contaminating substances, you must thoroughly clean and
decontaminate the device/replacement part before returning it in order to ensure that all
hollow areas are free from hazardous substances. Check the item after it has been cleaned.
Any devices/replacement parts returned without a decontamination declaration will be
cleaned at your expense before further processing.

11.5 Disposal

Devices described in this manual should be recycled. They may not be


disposed of in the municipal waste disposal services according to the Di‐
rective 2012/19/EC on waste electronic and electrical equipment (WEEE).
Devices can be returned to the supplier within the EC, or to a locally ap‐
proved disposal service for eco-friendly recycling. Observe the specific reg‐
ulations valid in your country.
Further information about devices containing batteries can be found at: In‐
formation on battery/product return (WEEE) (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/document/109479891/)

Note
Special disposal required
The device includes components that require special disposal.
● Dispose of the device properly and environmentally through a local waste disposal
contractor.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


180 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Diagnostics and troubleshooting 12
12.1 Device status symbols
The device status is displayed on the display with the help of symbols. In addition, you can
view the symbol and the corresponding text message for each device status in the remote
engineering, asset management or in the process control systems.
Alarms are displayed via local operation in the measurement view as symbol in the bottom
line of the display. If multiple diagnostic states are pending at the same time, the symbol for
the most critical status is displayed.

Properties of the device status


The table below shows the possible causes for the device status and measures for the user
or service.
The symbols used for the display are based on NAMUR status signals, while the symbols used
in SIMATIC PDM are based on standard diagnostic classes from Siemens.

Note
Priority conflict in the device status – NAMUR vs. Siemens standard
A priority conflict can arise when multiple diagnostic events are pending at the same time. In
this case, the NAMUR symbol on the local display differs from the symbol displayed in SIMATIC
PDM.
● Example: If both diagnostic states "Maintenance demanded" and "Configuration errors" are
pending
– The display (used NAMUR symbols) shows "Configuration errors" with a higher priority.
– SIMATIC PDM (uses Siemens standard symbols) shows "Maintenance demanded" with
higher priority.
Note the priority of the device status depending on the interface used.

Note
Priorities of the NAMUR device status
This device only used the priorities of the NAMUR device status based on the HCF
specification.

The order of the symbols in the table corresponds to the priority of the device status, starting
with the most critical message.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 181
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
12.1 Device status symbols

Device status symbols

Display NAMUR SIMATIC PDM/PLC


– NAMUR NE 107 – HCF
Symbol Device status Priority * Priority * Symbol Device status Priority *
Failure 1 1 Maintenance 1
alarm

Cause: Output signal invalid due to fault in the field device or in the peripherals.
Measure: Maintenance is required immediately.

Maintenance 3 4 Maintenance 2
required demanded

Cause:Output signal is still valid, but wear reserve is almost exhausted or a function will be limited soon.
Measure:Maintenance is recommend as soon as possible.

Maintenance 3 4 Maintenance 3
required required

Cause: Output signal is still valid. A limited function has not been detected, but wear reserve is anticipated within the next
few weeks.
Measure: Maintenance of device should be planned.

Function test 2 2 Manual opera‐ 4


tion

Cause: Output signal temporarily invalid (e.g. frozen) due to work being performed on the device.
Measure: Manual mode over HMI or disable the engineering system.

Function test 2 2 Simulation 5


mode

Cause: Output signal temporarily does not represent the process, because the output is based on a simulation.
Measure: Simulation mode over HMI or disable the engineering system or restart device.

Failure 1 1 Out of service 6

Cause: Output signal does not represent process value. Device mode is set to "Out of service".
Measure: Disable "Out of service" and enable normal operation.

Failure 1 1 Configuration 7
error
(red)
Cause: Output signal invalid due to parameter setting, connection error or configuration error in the HW.
Measure: Check hardware configuration of the device over HMI or engineering system.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


182 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
12.1 Device status symbols

Display NAMUR SIMATIC PDM/PLC


– NAMUR NE 107 – HCF
Symbol Device status Priority * Priority * Symbol Device status Priority *
Out of specifica‐ 4 3 Process value 8
tion alarm

Cause: Deviations from permissible ambient or process conditions detected by the device (by means of self-monitoring or
based on errors in the device) indicate that the measured value is unreliable or deviations from the set value in the actuators
is most likely greater than anticipated under normal operating conditions.
Process or ambient conditions will damage the device or result in unreliable output.
Measure: Check ambient temperature or process conditions. If possible, install device at different location.

Function test 2 2 Configuration 9


warning
(yellow)
Cause: Safety validation is not complete.
Measure: Acknowledge safety event in the Functional Safety menu and repeat safety commissioning.

Out of specifica‐ 4 3 Process value 10


tion warning

Cause: Deviations from permissible ambient or process conditions detected by the device (by means of self-monitoring or
based on warnings in the device) indicate that the measured value is unreliable or deviations from the set value in the
actuators is most likely greater than anticipated under normal operating conditions.
Process or ambient conditions can damage the device or result in unreliable output.
Measure: Check ambient temperature or process conditions. If possible, install device at different location.

No symbol is Process value 11


displayed tolerance
Cause:
Measure:

No symbol is No symbol is Configuration 12


displayed displayed changed
Cause:The device configuration has changed due to a work process.
Measure:

No symbol is Good – OK No symbol is No assignment 13


displayed displayed
Cause:
Measure:

* The smallest number indicates the highest level of error severity.


** In SIMATIC PDM, the Siemens standard symbol as well as the corresponding NA\ symbol
is displayed (by the device display).

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 183
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
12.2 Diagnostic messages

12.2 Diagnostic messages


The following table shows the IDs of diagnostic messages and possible causes and
instructions for corrective actions.

ID Symbols Message Cause/Remedy


A0 Event counter 1 The number of overruns of the process value (set in parameters "Upper
Number overruns above limit" and "Monitored value") has reached the threshold.
threshold Reset and acknowledge event counter.
Maintenance alarm Check process conditions.
Check limit monitoring and event counter settings.

A1 Event counter 1 The number of underruns of the process value (set in parameters "Lower
Number underruns above limit" and "Monitored value") has reached the threshold.
threshold Reset and acknowledge event counter.
Process alarm Check process conditions.
Check limit monitoring and event counter settings.
A2 Event counter 1 The number of underruns of the process value (set in parameters "Lower
Number underruns above limit" and "Monitored value") has reached the threshold.
threshold Reset and acknowledge event counter.
Maintenance required Check process conditions.
Check limit monitoring and event counter settings.
A3 Event counter 1 The number of underruns of the process value (set in parameters "Lower
Number underruns above limit" and "Monitored value") has reached the threshold.
threshold Reset and acknowledge event counter.
Maintenance alarm Check process conditions.
Check limit monitoring and event counter settings.
A4 Event counter 2 The number of overruns of the process value (set in parameters "Upper
Number overruns above limit" and "Monitored value") has reached the threshold.
threshold Reset and acknowledge event counter.
Process alarm Check process conditions.
Check limit monitoring and event counter settings.
A6 Event counter 2 The number of overruns of the process value (set in parameters "Upper
Number overruns above limit" and "Monitored value") has reached the threshold.
threshold Reset and acknowledge event counter.
Maintenance required Check process conditions.
Check limit monitoring and event counter settings.
A7 Event counter 2 The number of overruns of the process value (set in parameters "Upper
Number overruns above limit" and "Monitored value") has reached the threshold.
threshold Reset and acknowledge event counter.
Maintenance alarm Check process conditions.
Check limit monitoring and event counter settings.
A8 Event counter 2 The number of underruns of the process value (set in parameters "Lower
Number underruns above limit" and "Monitored value") has reached the threshold.
threshold Reset and acknowledge event counter.
Process alarm Check process conditions.
Check limit monitoring and event counter settings.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


184 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
12.2 Diagnostic messages

ID Symbols Message Cause/Remedy


A9 Event counter 2 The number of underruns of the process value (set in parameters "Lower
Number underruns above limit" and "Monitored value") has reached the threshold.
threshold Reset and acknowledge event counter.
Maintenance required Check process conditions.
Check limit monitoring and event counter settings.
AA Device lifetime: Mainte‐ Forthcoming end of configured device's lifetime.
nance demanded Maintenance is strongly recommended as soon as possible.

Ab Device lifetime: Mainte‐ Forthcoming end of configured device's lifetime.


nance required Maintenance of device should be planned.

AC Sensor lifetime: Mainte‐ Forthcoming end of configured sensor's lifetime.


nance demanded Maintenance is strongly recommended as soon as possible.

AD Sensor lifetime: Mainte‐ Forthcoming end of configured sensor's lifetime.


nance required Maintenance of device should be planned.

AE Service: Maintenance de‐ Forthcoming end of the configured service interval.


manded Maintenance is strongly recommended as soon as possible.

AF Service: Maintenance re‐ Forthcoming end of the configured service interval.


quired Maintenance of device should be planned.

AG Calibration: Maintenance Forthcoming end of the calibration interval.


demanded Maintenance is strongly recommended as soon as possible.

AH Calibration: Maintenance Forthcoming end of the calibration interval.


required Maintenance of device should be planned.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 185
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
12.2 Diagnostic messages

ID Symbols Message Cause/Remedy


AJ Limit monitoring 1 Monitored value is above limit (set in parameter "Upper limit").
Above limit

AL Limit monitoring 1 Monitored value is below limit (set in parameter "Lower limit").
Below limit

An Limit monitoring 2 Monitored value is above limit (set in parameter "Upper limit").
Above limit

Ao Limit monitoring 2 Monitored value is below limit (set in parameter "Lower limit").
Below limit

AU Event counter 1 The number of overruns of the process value (set in parameters "Upper
Number overruns above limit" and "Monitored value") has reached the threshold.
threshold Reset and acknowledge event counter.
Process alarm Check process conditions.
Check limit monitoring and event counter settings.
AY Event counter 1 The number of overruns of the process value (set in parameters "Upper
Number overruns above limit" and "Monitored value") has reached the threshold.
threshold Reset and acknowledge event counter.
Maintenance required Check process conditions.
Check limit monitoring and event counter settings.
bE Out of service The output signal does not represent the process value. The device mode
is set to "Out of service".
Repair required. Contact Technical Support.

bL Device restart due to unex‐ Watchdog function has detected an internal device error.
pected program error Restart the device.
If the problem persists, contact Technical Support.

bn Alarm sensor limit excee‐ Process value has reached the sensor limit.
ded Review process conditions versus product specifications.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


186 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
12.2 Diagnostic messages

ID Symbols Message Cause/Remedy


bS Event counter 2 The number of underruns of the process value (set in parameters "Lower
Number underruns above limit" and "Monitored value") has reached the threshold.
threshold Reset and acknowledge event counter.
Maintenance alarm Check process conditions.
Check limit monitoring and event counter settings.
CA Simulation mode The device is in simulation mode and one or more of its device variables
are not representative of the process.
Disable the simulation to return to normal operation.

Cb Diagnostics simulated The device is in simulation mode.


Disable the simulation to return to normal operation.

Co Loop current fixed The loop current is being held at a fixed value and is not responding to
process variations.
Enter the loop current output value for simulation.
Disable the simulation to return to normal operation.

CP Loop current in saturation The loop current has reached its upper (or lower) saturation limit and cannot
increase (or decrease) any further.
Adjust loop current scaling.

CU PV status: uncertain The value is outside of the physical sensor range. Accuracy may decrease.

CY PV status: bad The measured value is 10% higher than the physical sensor range.
Review process conditions versus product specifications.
Use a device that fulfills your process conditions.

Fb Supply voltage below limit. The supply voltage is too low.


Make sure input voltage is within product specification.

FC Supply voltage above limit The supply voltage is too high.


Make sure input voltage is within product specification.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 187
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
12.2 Diagnostic messages

ID Symbols Message Cause/Remedy


FE Loop current read back er‐ The loop current does not correspond to the expected value.
ror Check DAC trim settings.
Restore to factory DAC calibration.
If the problem persists, contact Technical Support.

FJ Process conditions out‐ Uncertain values due to process conditions.


side the specification Check installation for abnormal operating conditions.

Fn Connection failure to sen‐ Potential product damage.


sor subsystem. Restart the device.
If error continues, sensor subsystem may have a defect.
Repair required. Contact Technical Support.

Fo Sensor break Potential product damage.


Sensor has malfunctioned.
A replacement of sensor is recommended.
Contact Technical Support.

Fr Internal power supply is A replacement of the device is recommended.


out of allowable range. Contact Technical Support.

FS Electronics defect Defect of device electronics.


A replacement of the device is recommended.
Contact Technical Support.

SA Non-volatile memory Device electronics error.


check failure Restart the device.
If error continues, device electronics may have a defect.
Repair required. Contact Technical Support.

Sb Volatile memory check fail‐ Device electronics error.


ure Restart the device.
If error continues, device electronics may have a defect.
Repair required. Contact Technical Support.

SC Invalid device configura‐ One or more of parameters are set to invalid values.
tion Review configuration values and adjust as necessary.

(red)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


188 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
12.2 Diagnostic messages

ID Symbols Message Cause/Remedy


St Safety validation mode Device is in safety validation mode.
Complete the functional test and confirm that it was successful in the Func‐
tional Safety wizard.

SU Safety critical device error Acknowledge the error in menu "Functional Safety" and enable Functional
Safety mode.
Acknowledging safety-related errors (Page 168)
If the problem persists, contact Technical Support.

The following symbols are also used on the display and in SIMATIC PDM.

Display SIMATIC PDM/


PLC
Symbol Symbol Description
- Data exchanged

- No data exchanged

- Write protection disabled

EDIT - ● 'EDIT' is permanently enabled in the parameter view. You can read the parameter.
● 'EDIT' flashes in the edit view. You can change the parameter.
L Device is write-protected by a jumper.
LL Button lock of device is enabled
LP Parameters and device functions are write-protected with a user PIN.

SIL - Functional Safety is enabled


Co - The output current is constant (e.g. for loop test).

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 189
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
12.3 Troubleshooting

12.3 Troubleshooting

12.3.1 Troubleshooting Functional Security


Below you can find explanations on how to correct problems when enabling Functional Safety.

Information mes‐ Cause of error Remedy


sage on the dis‐
play
INVALID CFG Write protection via user PIN disabled. Activate write protection via the user PIN.
ACCES Enable user PIN (Page 134)
INVALID CFG Wrong characteristic curves selected. Select one of the following characteristic curves:
TRNFK ● Linear, proportional to pressure (PRESS).
● Linear, proportional to level (LEVEL).
● Proportional to flow rate, two-step linear up to the
application point (VSLN2 or MSLN2).
INVALID CFG Loop current fixed. Loop test or multidrop To return to normal operation, disable the loop test or
LOOPT mode are enabled. multidrop mode.
Loop test [31] (Page 137)
INVALID CFG Device in simulation mode: Pressure meas‐ Disable simulation to return to normal operation.
SIMUL ured value is simulated. Simulate constant pressure values (Page 144)
INVALID CFG Device in simulation mode: Diagnostics are si‐ Disable simulation to return to normal operation.
STSIM mulated. Simulate diagnostics (Page 145)
INVALID CFG Factory settings for Functional Safety are faul‐ Replace the device.
PARAM ty.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


190 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Technical data 13
13.1 Input

13.1.1 Gauge pressure

Gauge pressure input


Measured variable Gauge pressure
Measuring span (continuous‐ Measuring span Maximum permissible Maximum test
ly adjustable) or measuring operating pressure MAWP pressure
range, max. operating pres‐ (PS)
sure (in accordance with 8.3 … 250 mbar 4 bar 6 bar
2014/68/EU Pressure Equip‐
ment Directive) and max. test 0.83 ... 25 kPa 0.4 MPa 0.6 MPa
pressure (in accordance with 0.12 … 3.6 psi 58 psi 87 psi
DIN 16086) (for oxygen 0.01 … 1 bar 6 bar 9 bar
measurement, max. 100 bar
1 ... 100 kPa 0.6 MPa 0.9 MPa
and 60 °C ambient tempera‐
ture/process temperature) 0.15 … 14.5 psi 87 psi 130 psi
0.04 … 4 bar 20 bar 30 bar
4 ... 400 kPa 2 MPa 3 MPa
0.58 … 58 psi 290 psi 435 psi
0.16 … 16 bar 45 bar 70 bar
0.016 ... 1.6 MPa 4.5 MPa 7 MPa
2.3 … 232 psi 652 psi 1015 psi
0.63 … 63 bar 80 bar 120 bar
0.063 ... 6.3 MPa 8 MPa 12 MPa
9.1 … 914 psi 1160 psi 1740 psi
1.6 … 160 bar 240 bar 360 bar
0.16 ... 16 MPa 24 MPa 36 MPa
23 … 2321 psi 3480 psi 5221 psi
4 … 400 bar 400 bar 600 bar
0.4 ... 40 MPa 40 MPa 60 MPa
58 … 5802 psi 5802 psi 8702 psi
7 … 700 bar 800 bar 800 bar
0.7 ... 70 MPa 80 MPa 80 MPa
102 ... 10153 psi 11603 psi 11603 psi

Gauge pressure measuring limits


Lower measuring limit1)
● Measuring cell with silicone oil filling 30 mbar a/3 kPa a/0.44 psi a

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 191
Technical data
13.1 Input

Gauge pressure measuring limits


● Measuring cell with inert oil 30 mbar a/3 kPa a/0.44 psi a
● Measuring cell with FDA-compliant oil 100 mbar a/10 kPa a/1.45 psi a
Upper measuring limit 100% of max. range (for oxygen measurement: max. 100 bar/10 MPa/
1450 psi and 60 °C ambient temperature/medium temperature)
Start of scale value Between the measuring limits (continuously adjustable)

For 250 mbar/25 kPa/3.6 psi measuring cells, the low measuring limit is 750 mbar a/75 kPa a/
1)

10.8 psi a. The measuring cell is vacuum-tight down to 30 mbar a/3 kPa a/0.44 psi a.

13.1.2 Gauge pressure with front-flush diaphragm

Gauge pressure input with front-flush diaphragm


Measured variable Gauge pressure
Measuring span (continuous‐ Measuring span Maximum permissible Maximum test
ly adjustable) or measuring operating pressure MAWP pressure
range, max. operating pres‐ (PS)
sure and max. test pressure 0.01 … 1 bar Refer to the information on the nameplate of the pressure
1 ... 100 kPa transmitter and the data on the mounting flange1)
0.15 … 14.5 psi
0.04 … 4 bar
4 ... 400 kPa
0.58 … 58 psi
0.16 … 16 bar
0.016 ... 1.6 MPa
2.3 … 232 psi
0.6 … 63 bar
0.063 ... 6.3 MPa
9.1 … 914 psi
1)
The MAWP value of the pressure transmitter can be lower than the PN value of the mounting
flange and vice versa. To determine the maximum permissible operating pressure and the
maximum permissible test pressure, use the lowest value as reference.

Gauge pressure measuring limits with front-flush diaphragm


Lower measuring limit
● Measuring cell with silicone oil filling 100 mbar a/10 kPa a/1.45 psi a
● Measuring cell with inert oil 100 mbar a/10 kPa a/1.45 psi a
● Measuring cell with FDA-compliant oil 100 mbar a/10 kPa a/1.45 psi a
Upper measuring limit 100% of max. range

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


192 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Technical data
13.1 Input

13.1.3 Gauge pressure from the differential pressure series

Gauge pressure input from the differential pressure series


Measured variable Gauge pressure and differential pressure
Measuring span (continuous‐ Measuring span Maximum permissible Max. permissible
ly adjustable) and maximum operating pressure test pressure
operating pressure (accord‐ MAWP (PS)
ing to 2014/68/EU Pressure 1 ... 20 mbar 160 bar 240 bar
Equipment Directive)
0.1 ... 2 kPa 16 MPa 24 MPa
0.4015 … 8.031 inH2O 2320 psi 3480 psi
1 ... 60 mbar 160 bar 240 bar
0.1 ... 6 kPa 16 MPa 24 MPa
0.4015 … 24.09 inH2O 2320 psi 3480 psi
2.5 ... 250 mbar 160 bar 240 bar
0.2 ... 25 kPa 16 MPa 24 MPa
1.004 … 100.4 inH2O 2320 psi 3480 psi
6 ... 600 mbar 160 bar 240 bar
0.6 ... 60 kPa 16 MPa 24 MPa
2.409 … 240.9 inH2O 2320 psi 3480 psi
16 ... 1600 mbar 160 bar 240 bar
1.6 ... 160 kPa 16 MPa 24 MPa
6.424 … 642.4 inH2O 2320 psi 3480 psi
50 ... 5000 mbar 160 bar 240 bar
5 ... 500 kPa 16 MPa 24 MPa
20.08 … 2008 inH2O 2320 psi 3480 psi
0.3 … 30 bar 160 bar 240 bar
0.03 ... 3 MPa 16 MPa 24 MPa
4.35 … 435 psi 2320 psi 3480 psi
5 … 100 bar 160 bar 240 bar
0.5 ... 10 MPa 16 MPa 24 MPa
76.9 … 1450 psi 2320 psi 3480 psi

Gauge pressure measuring limits from differential pressure


series
Lower measuring limit
● Measuring cell with silicone oil filling 30 mbar a/3 kPa a/0.44 psi a
● Measuring cell with inert oil 30 mbar a/3 kPa a/0.44 psi a
● Measuring cell with FDA-compliant oil 100 mbar a/10 kPa a/1.45 psi a
Upper measuring limit 100% of max. range (for oxygen measurement: max. 100 bar/
10 MPa/1450 psi and 60 °C ambient temperature/medium
temperature)
Start of scale value Between the measuring limits (continuously adjustable)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 193
Technical data
13.1 Input

13.1.4 Absolute pressure from the gauge pressure series

Absolute pressure input from the gauge pressure series


Measured variable Absolute pressure
Measuring span (continuous‐ Measuring span Maximum permissible Maximum test
ly adjustable) or measuring operating pressure MAWP pressure
range, max. operating pres‐ (PS)
sure (in accordance with 8.3 … 250 mbar a 4 bar a 6 bar a
2014/68/EU Pressure Equip‐
ment Directive) and max. test 0.83 ... 25 kPa a 0.4 MPa a 0.6 MPa a
pressure (in accordance with 3 … 100 inH2O a 58 psi a 87 psi a
DIN 16086) 43 … 1300 mbar a 6.6 bar a 10 bar a
4.3 ... 130 kPa a 0.66 MPa a 1 MPa a
17 … 525 inH2O a 95 psi a 145 psi a
166 … 5000 mbar a 20 bar a 30 bar a
16.6 ... 500 kPa a 2 MPa a 3 MPa a
2.41 … 72.5 psi a 290 psi a 435 psi a
1 … 30 bar a 65 bar a 100 bar a
0.1 ... 3 MPa a 6.5 MPa a 10 MPa a
14.5 … 435 psi a 942 psi a 1450 psi a
5.3 … 160 bar a 240 bar a 380 bar a
0.53 ... 16 MPa a 24 MPa a 38 MPa a
77 … 2321 psi a 3480 psi a 5511 psi a
13.3 … 400 bar a 400 bar a 600 bar a
1.3 ... 40 MPa a 40 MPa a 60 MPa a
192 ... 5801 psi a 5801 psi a 8702 psi a
23.3 … 700 bar a 800 bar a 800 bar a
2.3 ... 70 MPa a 80 MPa a 80 MPa a
337 ... 10152 psi a 11603 psi a 11603 psi a

Absolute pressure measuring limits from


gauge pressure series
Lower measuring limit
● Measuring cell with silicone oil filling 0 mbar a/kPa a/psi a
● Measuring cell with inert oil
For process temperature 30 mbar a/3 kPa a/0.44 psi a
-20 °C < ϑ ≤ 60 °C (-4 °F < ϑ
≤ +140 °F)
For process temperature 30 mbar a + 20 mbar a • (ϑ - 60 °C)/°C
60 °C < ϑ ≤ 100 °C (max. 3 kPa a + 2 kPa a • (ϑ - 60 °C)/°C
85 °C for measuring cell
0.44 psi a + 0.29 psi a • (ϑ - 140 °F)/°F
30 bar) (140 °F < ϑ ≤ 212 °F
(max. 185 °F for measuring
cell 435 psi))

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


194 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Technical data
13.1 Input

Absolute pressure measuring limits from


gauge pressure series
Upper measuring limit 100% of max. range (for oxygen measurement: max. 100 bar/10 MPa/
1450 psi and 60 °C ambient temperature/medium temperature)
Lower range value Between the measuring limits (continuously adjustable)

13.1.5 Absolute pressure with front-flush diaphragm

Absolute pressure with front-flush diaphragm


Measured variable Absolute pressure
Measuring span (continuous‐ Measuring span Maximum permissible Maximum test
ly adjustable) or measuring operating pressure MAWP pressure
range, max. operating pres‐ (PS)
sure and max. test pressure 43 … 1300 mbar a Refer to the information on the nameplate of the pressure
4.3 ... 130 kPa a transmitter and the data on the mounting flange1)
17 … 525 inH2O a
166 … 5000 mbar a
16.6 ... 500 kPa a
2.41 … 72.5 psi a
1 … 30 bar a
0.1 ... 3 MPa a
14.5 … 435 psi a
Depending on the process connection, the measuring span may differ from these values
1)
The MAWP value of the pressure transmitter can be lower than the PN value of the mounting
flange and vice versa. To determine the maximum permissible operating pressure and the
maximum permissible test pressure, use the lowest value as reference.

Absolute pressure measuring limits with front-flush diaphragm


Lower measuring limit
● Measuring cell with silicone oil filling 0 mbar a/kPa a/psi a
Upper measuring limit 100% of max. range
Lower range value Between the measuring limits (continuously adjustable)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 195
Technical data
13.1 Input

13.1.6 Absolute pressure from the differential pressure series

Absolute pressure input from the differential pressure series


Measured variable Absolute pressure
Measuring span (continuous‐ Measuring span Maximum permissible Max. permissible
ly adjustable) and maximum operating pressure test pressure
operating pressure (accord‐ MAWP (PS)
ing to 2014/68/EU Pressure 8.3 … 250 mbar a 160 bar a 240 bar a
Equipment Directive)
0.83 ... 25 kPa a 16 MPa a 24 MPa a
3 … 100 inH2O a 2320 psi a 3480 psi a
43 … 1300 mbar a 160 bar a 240 bar a
4.3 ... 130 kPa a 16 MPa a 24 MPa a
17 … 525 inH2O a 2320 psi a 3480 psi a
166 … 5000 mbar a 160 bar a 240 bar a
16.6 ... 500 kPa a 16 MPa a 24 MPa a
2.41 … 72.5 psi a 2320 psi a 3480 psi a
1 … 30 bar a 160 bar a 240 bar a
0.1 ... 3 MPa a 16 MPa a 24 MPa a
14.5 … 435 psi a 2320 psi a 3480 psi a
5 … 100 bar a 160 bar a 240 bar a
0.5 ... 10 MPa a 16 MPa a 24 MPa a
76.9 … 1450 psi a 2320 psi a 3480 psi a

Absolute pressure measuring limits from dif‐


ferential pressure series
Lower measuring limit
● Measuring cell with silicone oil filling 0 mbar a/kPa a/psi a
● Measuring cell with inert liquid
For process temperature -20 °C < 30 mbar a/3 kPa a/0.44 psi a
ϑ ≤ 60 °C (-4 °F < ϑ ≤ +140 °F)
For process temperature 60 °C < ϑ 30 mbar a + 20 mbar a • (ϑ - 60 °C)/°C
≤ 100 °C (max. 85 °C for measur‐ 3 kPa a + 2 kPa a • (ϑ - 60 °C)/°C
ing cell 30 bar) (140 °F < ϑ ≤ 212 °F
0.44 psi a + 0.29 psi a • (ϑ - 140 °F)/°F
(max. 185 °F for measuring cell
435 psi))
Upper measuring limit 100% of max. range (for oxygen measurement: max. 100 bar/10 MPa/
1450 psi and 60 °C ambient temperature/medium temperature)
Start of scale value Between the measuring limits (continuously adjustable)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


196 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Technical data
13.1 Input

13.1.7 Differential pressure and flow

Differential pressure input and flow


Measured variable Differential pressure and flow
Measuring span (continuous‐ Measuring span Maximum permissible Max. permissible
ly adjustable) and maximum operating pressure test pressure
operating pressure (accord‐ MAWP (PS)
ing to 2014/68/EU Pressure 1 ... 20 mbar 160 bar 240 bar
Equipment Directive)
0.1 ... 2 kPa 16 MPa 24 MPa
0.4015 … 8.031 inH2O 2320 psi 3480 psi
1 ... 60 mbar 160 bar 240 bar
0.1 ... 6 kPa 16 MPa 24 MPa
0.4015 … 24.09 inH2O 2320 psi 3480 psi
2.5 ... 250 mbar 160 bar 240 bar
0.2 ... 25 kPa 16 MPa 24 MPa
1.004 … 100.4 inH2O 2320 psi 3480 psi
6 ... 600 mbar 160 bar 240 bar
0.6 ... 60 kPa 16 MPa 24 MPa
2.409 … 240.9 inH2O 2320 psi 3480 psi
16 ... 1600 mbar 160 bar 240 bar
1.6 ... 160 kPa 16 MPa 24 MPa
6.424 … 642.4 inH2O 2320 psi 3480 psi
50 ... 5000 mbar 160 bar 240 bar
5 ... 500 kPa 16 MPa 24 MPa
20.08 … 2008 inH2O 2320 psi 3480 psi
0.3 … 30 bar 160 bar 240 bar
0.03 ... 3 MPa 16 MPa 24 MPa
4.35 … 435 psi 2320 psi 3480 psi
2.5 ... 250 mbar 420 bar 630 bar
0.25 ... 25 kPa 42 MPa 63 MPa
1.004 … 100.4 inH2O 6091 psi 9137 psi
6 ... 600 mbar 420 bar 630 bar
0.6 ... 60 kPa 42 MPa 63 MPa
2.409 … 240.9 inH2O 6091 psi 9137 psi
16 ... 1600 mbar 420 bar 630 bar
1.6 ... 160 kPa 42 MPa 63 MPa
6.424 … 642.4 inH2O 6091 psi 9137 psi
50 ... 5000 mbar 420 bar 630 bar
5 ... 500 kPa 42 MPa 63 MPa
20.08 … 2008 inH2O 6091 psi 9137 psi
0.3 … 30 bar 420 bar 630 bar
0.03 ... 3 MPa 42 MPa 63 MPa
4.35 … 435 psi 6091 psi 9137 psi

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 197
Technical data
13.1 Input

Differential pressure and flow measuring limits


Lower measuring limit
● Measuring cell -100% of maximum measuring range or 30 mbar a /3 kPa a /0.44 psi a
with silicone oil
filling
● Measuring cell with inert oil
For process temperature -20 °C -100% of maximum measuring range or 30 mbar a /3 kPa a /0.44 psi a
< ϑ ≤ 60 °C (-4 °F < ϑ ≤ +140 °F)
For process temperature 60 °C -100% of maximum measuring range or 30 mbar a /3 kPa a /0.44 psi a
< ϑ ≤ 100 °C (max. 85 °C for 30 mbar a + 20 mbar a • (ϑ - 60 °C)/°C
measuring cell 30 bar with
3 kPa a + 2 kPa a • (ϑ - 60 °C)/°C
PN420) (140 °F < ϑ ≤ 212 °F
(max. 185 °F for measuring cell 0.44 psi a + 0.29 psi a • (ϑ - 140 °F)/°F
435 psi))
● Measuring cell For process temperature -10 °C -100% of maximum measuring range or 100 mbar a /10 kPa a /
with FDA- < ϑ ≤ 100 °C (-14 °F < ϑ 14.5 psi a.
compliant oil ≤ +212 °F)
Upper measuring 100% of max. range (for oxygen measurement: max. 100 bar/10 MPa/1450 psi and 60 °C ambient
limit temperature/medium temperature)
Start of scale value Between the measuring limits (continuously adjustable)

13.1.8 Level

Level input
Measured variable Level
Measuring span (continuous‐ Measuring span Maximum permissible Max. permissible
ly adjustable) and maximum operating pressure test pressure
operating pressure (accord‐ MAWP (PS)
ing to 2014/68/EU Pressure 25 ... 250 mbar See mounting flange
Equipment Directive)
2.5 ... 25 kPa
10 … 100 inH2O
25 ... 600 mbar
2.5 ... 60 kPa
10 … 240 inH2O
53 … 1600 mbar
5.3 ... 160 kPa
21 … 640 inH2O
166 … 5000 mbar
16.6 ... 500 kPa
2.41 … 72.5 psi

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


198 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Technical data
13.2 Measuring accuracy of SITRANS P320

Level measuring limits


Lower measuring limit
Measuring cell with silicone oil -100% of max. measuring range or 30 mbar a/3 kPa a/0.44 psi a depending
filling on the mounting flange
Measuring cell with inert oil -100% of max. measuring range or 30 mbar a/3 kPa a/0.44 psi a depending
on the mounting flange
Measuring cell with FDA-com‐ -100% of maximum measuring range or 100 mbar a /10 kPa a /1.45 psi a
pliant oil
Upper measuring limit 100% of max. range
Lower range value Between the measuring limits (continuously adjustable)

13.2 Measuring accuracy of SITRANS P320

13.2.1 Reference conditions


● According to EN 60770-1/IEC 61298-1
● Rising characteristic curve
● Lower range value 0 bar/kPa/psi
● Seal diaphragm stainless steel
● Measuring cell with silicone oil filling
● Room temperature 25 °C (77 °F)

13.2.2 Effect of auxiliary power supply


0.005% per 1 V (in percent per change in voltage)

13.2.3 Gauge pressure

Conformity error at limit point setting, including hysteresis and repeatability - gauge pressure
Measuring span ratio r (spread, Turn-Down) r = max. measuring span/set measuring span and nominal
measuring range
● Linear characteristic curve r ≤ 1.25 1.25 < r ≤ 30
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.6 psi ≤ 0.075% ≤ (0.008 • r + 0.055)%
● Linear characteristic curve r≤5 5 < r ≤ 100

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 199
Technical data
13.2 Measuring accuracy of SITRANS P320

Conformity error at limit point setting, including hysteresis and repeatability - gauge pressure
1 bar/100 kPa/14.5 psi ≤ 0.065% ≤ (0.004 • r + 0.045)%
4 bar/400 kPa/58 psi
16 bar/1.6 MPa/232 psi
63 bar/6.3 MPa/914 psi
160 bar/16 MPa/12321 psi

● Linear characteristic r≤3 3 < r ≤ 100


curve
400 bar/40 MPa/5802 psi ≤ 0.075% 0.005 • r + 0.05
700 bar/70 MPa/10152 psi

Effect of ambient temperature - gauge pressure


In percent per 28 °C (50 °F)
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.6 psi ≤ (0.16 • r + 0.1)%
1 bar/100 kPa/14.5 psi ≤ (0.05 • r + 0.1)%
4 bar/400 kPa/58 psi ≤ (0.025 • r + 0.125)%
16 bar/1.6 MPa/232 psi
63 bar/6.3 MPa/914 psi
160 bar/16 MPa/2321 psi
400 bar/40 MPa/5802 psi
700 bar/70 MPa/10152 psi ≤ (0.08 • r + 0.16)%

Long-term stability at ±30 °C (±54 °F) - gauge pressure


250 mbar/25 kPa/3.6 psi Per year ≤ (0.25 • r)%
1 bar/100 kPa/14.5 psi In 5 years ≤ (0.25 • r)%
In 10 years ≤ (0.35 • r)%
4 bar/400 kPa/58 psi In 5 years ≤ (0.125 • r)%
16 bar/1.6 MPa/232 psi In 10 years ≤ (0.15 • r)%
63 bar/6.3 MPa/914 psi
160 bar/16 MPa/2321 psi
400 bar/40 MPa/5802 psi
700 bar/70 MPa/10152 psi In 5 years ≤ (0.25 • r)%
In 10 years ≤ (0.35 • r)%

Step response time T63 (without electrical damping) - gauge pressure


Approx. 0.105 s

Effect of mounting position - gauge pressure


≤ 0.05 mbar/0.005 kPa/0.000725 psi per 10° incline
(correct the zero point with position error compensation)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


200 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Technical data
13.2 Measuring accuracy of SITRANS P320

13.2.4 Gauge pressure from the differential pressure series

Conformity error at limit point setting, including hysteresis and repeatability - gauge pressure from the differential pressure
series
Measuring span ratio r (spread, Turn-Down) r = max. measuring span/set measuring span and
nominal measuring range
● Linear characteristic curve r≤5 5 < r ≤ 20
20 mbar/2 kPa/8.031 inH2O ≤ 0.075% ≤ (0.005 • r + 0.05)%
● Linear characteristic curve r≤5 5 < r ≤ 60
60 mbar/6 kPa/24.09 inH2O ≤ 0.075% ≤ (0.005 • r + 0.05)%
● Linear characteristic curve r≤5 5 < r ≤ 100
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.6 psi ≤ 0.065% ≤ (0.004 • r + 0.045)%
600 mbar/60 kPa/240.9 inH2O
1600 mbar/160 kPa/642.4 inH2O
5000 mbar/500 kPa/2008 inH2O
30 bar/3 MPa/435 psi
● Linear characteristic curve 100 bar/10 MPa/1450.3 psi r ≤ 10 10 < r ≤ 30
≤ 0.1% ≤ 0.2%

Effect of ambient temperature - gauge pressure from differential pressure series


In percent per 28 °C (50 °F)
20 mbar/2 kPa/8.031 inH2O ≤ (0.15 • r + 0.1)%
60 mbar/6 kPa/24.09 inH2O ≤ (0.075 • r + 0.1)%
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.6 psi ≤ (0.025 • r + 0.125)%
600 mbar/60 kPa/240.9 inH2O
1600 mbar/160 kPa/642.4 inH2O
5000 mbar/500 kPa/2008 inH2O
30 bar/3 MPa/435 psi
100 bar/10 MPa/1450.3 psi ≤ (0.08 • r + 0.16)

Long-term stability at ±30 °C (±54 °F) - gauge pressure from differential pressure series
20 mbar/2 kPa/8.031 inH2O Per year ≤ (0.2 • r)%
60 mbar/6 kPa/24.09 inH2O In 5 years ≤ (0.25 • r)%
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.6 psi In 5 years ≤ (0.125 • r)%
600 mbar/60 kPa/240.9 inH2O In 10 years ≤ (0.15 • r)%
1600 mbar/160 kPa/642.4 inH2O
5000 mbar/500 kPa/2008 inH2O
30 bar/3 MPa/435 psi In 5 years ≤ (0.25 • r)%
In 10 years ≤ (0.35 • r)%
100 bar/10 MPa/1450.3 psi In 5 years ≤ (0.25 • r)%

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 201
Technical data
13.2 Measuring accuracy of SITRANS P320

Step response time T63 (without electrical damping) - gauge pressure from differential pressure series
20 mbar/2 kPa/8.031 inH2O Approx. 0.160 s
60 mbar/6 kPa/24.09 inH2O Approx. 0.150 s
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.6 psi Approx. 0.135 s
600 mbar/60 kPa/240.9 inH2O
1600 mbar/160 kPa/642.4 inH2O
5000 mbar/500 kPa/2008 inH2O
30 bar/3 MPa/435 psi
100 bar/10 MPa/1450.3 psi Approx. 0.145 s

Effect of mounting position - gauge pressure from differential pressure series


≤ 0.7 mbar/0.007 kPa/0.01015266 psi per 10° incline
(correct the zero point with position error compensation)

13.2.5 Absolute pressure from gauge and differential pressure series

Conformity error at limit point setting, including hysteresis and repeatability - absolute pressure from gauge and differential
pressure series
Measuring span ratio r (spread, Turn-Down) r = max. measuring span/set measuring span and nominal
measuring range
● Linear characteristic curve r ≤ 10 10 < r ≤ 30
All measuring cells ≤ 0.1% ≤ 0.2%

Effect of ambient temperature - absolute pressure from gauge and differential pressure series
In percent per 28 °C (50 °F)
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.6 psi ≤ (0.15 • r + 0.1)
1300 mbar a/130 kPa a/18.8 psi a ≤ (0.08 • r + 0.16)
5 bar a/500 kPa a/72.5 psi a
30 bar a/3000 kPa a/435 psi a
100 bar a/10 MPa a/1450.3 psi a
160 bar a/16 MPa a/2321 psi a
400 bar a/40 MPa a/5802 psi a
700 bar a/70 MPa a/10152.6 psi a

Long-term stability at ±30 °C (±54 °F) - absolute pressure from gauge and differential pressure series
In 5 years ≤ (0.25 • r)%

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


202 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Technical data
13.2 Measuring accuracy of SITRANS P320

Step response time T63 (without electrical damping) - absolute pressure from gauge and differential pressure series
Gauge pressure series
All measuring cells Approx. 0.105 s
Differential pressure series
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.6 psi Approx. 0.195 s
1300 mbar a/130 kPa a/18.8 psi a Approx. 0.145 s
5 bar a/500 kPa a/72.5 psi a
30 bar a/3000 kPa a/435 psi a
100 bar a/10 MPa a/1450.3 psi a

Effect of mounting position - absolute pressure from gauge and differential pressure series
In pressure per change of angle
● For absolute pressure (from the gauge pressure series): ≤ 0.05 mbar/0.005 kPa/
0.000725 psi per 10° incline
● For absolute pressure (from the differential pressure series): 0.7 mbar/0.07 kPa/
0.001015 psi per 10° incline
(zero-point correction is possible using the zero point adjustment)

13.2.6 Absolute pressure with front-flush diaphragm

Conformity error at limit point setting, including hysteresis and repeatability


Measuring span ratio r (spread, Turn-Down) r = max. measuring span/set measuring span and nominal
measuring range
Linear characteristic curve r ≤ 10 10 < r ≤ 30
All measuring cells ≤ 0.2% ≤ 0.4%

Effect of ambient temperature


In percent per 28 °C (50 °F)
All measuring cells ≤ (0.16 • r + 0.24)

Long-term stability at ±30 °C (±54 °F)


All measuring cells In 5 years ≤ (0.25 • r)%

Step response time T63 (without electrical damping)


Approx. 0.105 s

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 203
Technical data
13.2 Measuring accuracy of SITRANS P320

Effect of mounting position


In pressure per change of angle
0.04 kPa/0.4 mbar/0.006 psi per 10° incline
(zero-point correction is possible with position error compen‐
sation)

13.2.7 Gauge pressure with front-flush diaphragm

Conformity error at limit point setting, including hysteresis and repeatability - gauge pressure with front-flush diaphragm
Measuring span ratio r (spread, Turn-Down) r = max. measuring span/set measuring span and nominal
measuring range
● Linear characteristic curve r≤5 5 < r ≤ 100
1 bar/100 kPa/14.5 psi ≤ 0.075% ≤ (0.005 • r + 0.05)%
4 bar/400 kPa/58 psi
16 bar/1.6 MPa/232 psi
63 bar/6.3 MPa/914 psi

Effect of ambient temperature - gauge pressure with front-flush diaphragm


In percent per 28 °C (50 °F)
1 bar/100 kPa/14.5 psi ≤ (0.08 • r + 0.16)%
4 bar/400 kPa/58 psi
16 bar/1.6 MPa/232 psi
63 bar/6.3 MPa/914 psi

Long-term stability at ±30 °C (±54 °F) - gauge pressure with front-flush diaphragm
1 bar/100 kPa/14.5 psi In 5 years ≤ (0.25 • r)%
4 bar/400 kPa/58 psi
16 bar/1.6 MPa/232 psi In 5 years ≤ (0.125 • r)%
63 bar/6.3 MPa/914 psi

Step response time T63 (without electrical damping) - gauge pressure with front-flush diaphragm
Approx. 0.105 s

Effect of mounting position - gauge pressure with front-flush diaphragm


≤ 0.4 mbar/0.04 kPa/0.006 psi per 10° incline
(zero-point correction is possible with position error compen‐
sation)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


204 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Technical data
13.2 Measuring accuracy of SITRANS P320

13.2.8 Differential pressure and flow

Conformity error at limit point setting, including hysteresis and repeatability - differential pressure and flow
Measuring span ratio r (spread, Turn-Down) r = max. measuring span/set measuring span and nomi‐
nal measuring range
Linear characteristic curve r≤5 5 < r ≤ 20
20 mbar/2 kPa/0.29 psi ≤ 0.075% ≤ (0.005 • r + 0.05)%
Linear characteristic curve r≤5 5 < r ≤ 60
60 mbar/6 kPa/0.87 psi ≤ 0.075% ≤ (0.005 • r + 0.05)%
Linear characteristic curve r≤5 5 < r ≤ 100
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi ≤ 0.065% ≤ (0.004 • r + 0.045)%
600 mbar/60 kPa/8.70 psi
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi
30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi
Root extraction characteris‐ r≤5 5 < r ≤ 20
tic
Flow > 50%
20 mbar/2 kPa/0.29 psi ≤ 0.075% ≤ (0.005 • r + 0.05)%
Root extraction characteris‐ r≤5 5 < r ≤ 60
tic
Flow > 50%
60 mbar/6 kPa/0.87 psi ≤ 0.075% ≤ (0.005 • r + 0.05)%
Root extraction characteris‐ r≤5 5 < r ≤ 100
tic
Flow > 50%
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi ≤ 0.065% ≤ (0.004 • r + 0.045)%
600 mbar/60 kPa/8.70 psi
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi
30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi
Root extraction characteris‐ r≤5 5 < r ≤ 20
tic
Flow 25 ... 50%
20 mbar/2 kPa/0.29 psi ≤ 0.15% ≤ (0.01 • r + 0.1)%
Root extraction characteris‐ r≤5 5 < r ≤ 60
tic
Flow 25 ... 50%
60 mbar/6 kPa/0.87 psi ≤ 0.15% ≤ (0.01 • r + 0.1)%
Root extraction characteris‐ r≤5 5 < r ≤ 100
tic

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 205
Technical data
13.2 Measuring accuracy of SITRANS P320

Conformity error at limit point setting, including hysteresis and repeatability - differential pressure and flow
Flow 25 ... 50%
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi ≤ 0.13% ≤ (0.008 • r + 0.09)%
600 mbar/60 kPa/8.70 psi
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi
30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi

Effect of ambient temperature - differential pressure and flow


In percent per 28 °C (50 °F)
20 mbar/2 kPa/0.29 psi ≤ (0.15 • r + 0.1)%
60 mbar/6 kPa/0.87 psi ≤ (0.075 • r + 0.1)%
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi ≤ (0.025 • r + 0.125)%
600 mbar/60 kPa/8.70 psi
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi
30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi

Effect of static pressure - differential pressure and flow


● On the lower range value
20 mbar/2 kPa/0.29 psi ≤ (0.15 • r)% per 70 bar (zero-point correction is
possible with position error compensation)
60 mbar/6 kPa/0.87 psi ≤ (0.1 • r)% per 70 bar (zero-point correction is
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi possible with position error compensation)
600 mbar/60 kPa/8.70 psi
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi ≤ (0.15 • r)% per 70 bar (zero-point correction is
possible with position error compensation)
● On the measuring span
20 mbar/2 kPa/0.29 psi ≤ 0.2% per 70 bar
60 mbar/6 kPa/0.87 psi ≤ 0.1% per 70 bar
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi
600 mbar/60 kPa/8.70 psi
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi
30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi

Long-term stability at ±30 °C (±54 °F) - differential pressure and flow


Static pressure max. 70 bar/7 MPa/1015 psi
20 mbar/2 kPa/0.29 psi Per year ≤ (0.2 • r)%
60 mbar/6 kPa/0.87 psi In 5 years ≤ (0.25 • r)%

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


206 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Technical data
13.2 Measuring accuracy of SITRANS P320

Long-term stability at ±30 °C (±54 °F) - differential pressure and flow


250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi In 5 years ≤ (0.125 • r)%
600 mbar/60 kPa/8.70 psi In 10 years ≤ (0.15 • r)%
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi
30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi In 5 years ≤ (0.25 • r)%
In 10 years ≤ (0.35 • r)%

Step response time T63 (without electrical damping) - - differential pressure and flow (PN160)
20 mbar/2 kPa/0.29 psi Approx. 0.160 s

60 mbar/6 kPa/0.87 psi Approx. 0.150 s

250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 ps Approx. 0.135 s


600 mbar/60 kPa/8.70 psi
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi
30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi

Step response time T63 (without electrical damping) - - differential pressure and flow (PN420)
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi Approx. 0.25 s
600 mbar/60 kPa/8.70 psi Approx. 0.2 s
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi
30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi

Effect of mounting position - differential pressure and flow


Effect of mounting position In pressure per change of angle
≤ 0.7 mbar/0.07 kPa/0.028
inH2O per 10° incline
(zero-point correction is possible
with position error compensation)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 207
Technical data
13.2 Measuring accuracy of SITRANS P320

13.2.9 Level

Conformity error at limit point setting, including hysteresis and repeatability - level
Measuring span ratio r (spread, r = max. measuring span/set measuring span and nominal measuring range
Turn-Down)
● Linear characteristic curve r≤5 5 < r ≤ 10
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi ≤ 0.065% ≤ (0.004 • r + 0.045)%
600 mbar/60 kPa/8.70 psi
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi

Effect of ambient temperature1) - level


In percent per 28 °C (50 °F)
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi ≤ (0.025 • r + 0.125)%
600 mbar/60 kPa/8.70 psi
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi
1)
Data only applies to the basic unit. The error of the remote seal must be considered additively.

Effect of static pressure - level


● On the lower range value
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi ≤ (0.1 • r)% per 70 bar (zero-point correction is possible with position error
600 mbar/60 kPa/8.70 psi compensation)
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi ≤ (0.15 • r)% per 70 bar (zero-point correction is possible with position error
compensation)
● On the measuring span ≤ (0.1 • r)% per 70 bar

Long-term stability at ±30 °C (±54 °F) - level


All measuring cells In 5 years ≤ (0.25 • r)% static pressure max. 70 bar/7 MPa/
1015 psi

Effect of mounting position - level


Depends on the fill fluid in the
mounting flange

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


208 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Technical data
13.3 Measuring accuracy of SITRANS P420

13.3 Measuring accuracy of SITRANS P420

13.3.1 Reference conditions


● According to EN 60770-1/IEC 61298-1
● Rising characteristic curve
● Lower range value 0 bar/kPa/psi
● Seal diaphragm stainless steel
● Measuring cell with silicone oil filling
● Room temperature 25 °C (77 °F)

13.3.2 Effect of auxiliary power supply


0.005% per 1 V (in percent per change in voltage)

13.3.3 Gauge pressure

Conformity error at limit point setting, including hysteresis and repeatability - gauge pressure
Measuring span ratio r (spread, Turn-Down) r = max. measuring span/set measuring span and nominal
measuring range
● Linear characteristic curve r ≤ 1.25 1.25 < r ≤ 30
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.6 psi ≤ 0.065% ≤ (0.008 • r + 0.055)%
● Linear characteristic curve r≤5 5 < r ≤ 100
1 bar/100 kPa/14.5 psi ≤ 0.04% ≤ (0.004 • r + 0.045)%
4 bar/400 kPa/58 psi
16 bar/1.6 MPa/232 psi
63 bar/6.3 MPa/914 psi
160 bar/16 MPa/12321 psi
● Linear characteristic curve r≤5 5 < r ≤ 100
400 bar/40 MPa/5802 psi ≤ 0.075% ≤ (0.005 • r + 0.05)%
700 bar/70 MPa/10152 psi

Effect of ambient temperature - gauge pressure


In percent per 28 °C (50 °F)
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.6 psi ≤ (0.16 • r + 0.1)%
1 bar/100 kPa/14.5 psi ≤ (0.05 • r + 0.1)%

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 209
Technical data
13.3 Measuring accuracy of SITRANS P420

Effect of ambient temperature - gauge pressure


4 bar/400 kPa/58 psi ≤ (0.025 • r + 0.125)%
16 bar/1.6 MPa/232 psi
63 bar/6.3 MPa/914 psi
160 bar/16 MPa/2321 psi
400 bar/40 MPa/5802 psi
700 bar/70 MPa/10152 psi ≤ (0.08 • r + 0.16)%

Long-term stability at ±30 °C (±54 °F) - gauge pressure


250 mbar/25 kPa/3.6 psi Per year ≤ (0.25 • r)%
1 bar/100 kPa/14.5 psi In 5 years ≤ (0.25 • r)%
In 10 years ≤ (0.35 • r)%
4 bar/400 kPa/58 psi In 5 years ≤ (0.125 • r)%
16 bar/1.6 MPa/232 psi In 10 years ≤ (0.15 • r)%
63 bar/6.3 MPa/914 psi
160 bar/16 MPa/2321 psi
400 bar/40 MPa/5802 psi
700 bar/70 MPa/10152 psi In 5 years ≤ (0.25 • r)%
In 10 years ≤ (0.35 • r)%

Step response time T63 (without electrical damping) - gauge pressure


Approx. 0.105 s

Effect of mounting position - gauge pressure


≤ 0.05 mbar/0.005 kPa/0.000725 psi per 10° incline
(zero-point correction is possible with position error compen‐
sation)

13.3.4 Gauge pressure from the differential pressure series

Conformity error at limit point setting, including hysteresis and repeatability - gauge pressure from differential pressure series
Measuring span ratio r (spread, Turn-Down) r = max. measuring span/set measuring span and nomi‐
nal measuring range
● Linear characteristic curve r≤5 5 < r ≤ 20
20 mbar/2 kPa/8.031 inH2O ≤ 0.075% ≤ (0.005 • r + 0.05)%
● Linear characteristic curve r≤5 5 < r ≤ 60
60 mbar/6 kPa/24.09 inH2O ≤ 0.075% ≤ (0.005 • r + 0.05)%
● Linear characteristic curve r≤5 5 < r ≤ 100

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


210 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Technical data
13.3 Measuring accuracy of SITRANS P420

Conformity error at limit point setting, including hysteresis and repeatability - gauge pressure from differential pressure series
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.6 psi ≤ 0.04% ≤ (0.004 • r + 0.045)%
600 mbar/60 kPa/240.9 inH2O
1600 mbar/160 kPa/642.4 inH2O
5000 mbar/500 kPa/2008 inH2O
30 bar/3 MPa/435 psi
● Linear characteristic 100 bar/10 MPa/1450.3 psi r ≤ 10 10 < r ≤ 30
curve
≤ 0.1% ≤ 0.2%

Effect of ambient temperature - gauge pressure from differential pressure series


In percent per 28 °C (50 °F)
20 mbar/2 kPa/8.031 inH2O ≤ (0.15 • r + 0.1)%
60 mbar/6 kPa/24.09 inH2O ≤ (0.075 • r + 0.1)%
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.6 psi ≤ (0.025 • r + 0.0625)%
5000 mbar/500 kPa/2008 inH2O
600 mbar/60 kPa/240.9 inH2O ≤ (0.0125 • r + 0.0625)%
1600 mbar/160 kPa/642.4 inH2O
30 bar/3 MPa/435 psi
100 bar/10 MPa/1450.3 psi ≤ (0.08 • r + 0.16)%

Long-term stability at ±30 °C (±54 °F) - gauge pressure from differential pressure series
20 mbar/2 kPa/8.031 inH2O Per year ≤ (0.2 • r)%
60 mbar/6 kPa/24.09 inH2O In 5 years ≤ (0.25 • r)%
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.6 psi In 5 years ≤ (0.125 • r)%
600 mbar/60 kPa/240.9 inH2O In 10 years ≤ (0.15 • r)%
1600 mbar/160 kPa/642.4 inH2O
5000 mbar/500 kPa/2008 inH2O
30 bar/3 MPa/435 psi In 5 years ≤ (0.25 • r)%
In 10 years ≤ (0.35 • r)%
100 bar/10 MPa/1450.3 psi In 5 years ≤ (0.25 • r)%

Step response time T63 (without electrical damping) - gauge pressure from differential pressure series
20 mbar/2 kPa/8.031 inH2O Approx. 0.160 s
60 mbar/6 kPa/24.09 inH2O Approx. 0.150 s
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.6 psi Approx. 0.135 s
600 mbar/60 kPa/240.9 inH2O
1600 mbar/160 kPa/642.4 inH2O
5000 mbar/500 kPa/2008 inH2O
30 bar/3 MPa/435 psi
100 bar/10 MPa/1450.3 psi Approx. 0.145 s

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 211
Technical data
13.3 Measuring accuracy of SITRANS P420

Effect of mounting position


≤ 0.7 mbar/0.007 kPa/0.01015266 psi per 10° incline
(zero-point correction is possible with position error compen‐
sation)

13.3.5 Absolute pressure from gauge and differential pressure series

Conformity error at limit point setting, including hysteresis and repeatability - absolute pressure from gauge and differential
pressure series
Measuring span ratio r (spread, Turn-Down) r = max. measuring span/set measuring span and nominal
measuring range
● Linear characteristic curve r ≤ 10 10 < r ≤ 30
All measuring cells ≤ 0.1% ≤ 0.2%

Effect of ambient temperature - absolute pressure from gauge and differential pressure series
In percent per 28 °C (50 °F)
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.6 psi ≤ (0.15 • r + 0.1)
1300 mbar a/130 kPa a/18.8 psi a ≤ (0.08 • r + 0.16)
5 bar a/500 kPa a/72.5 psi a
30 bar a/3000 kPa a/435 psi a
100 bar a/10 MPa a/1450.3 psi a
160 bar a/16 MPa a/2321 psi a
400 bar a/40 MPa a/5802 psi a
700 bar a/70 MPa a/10152.6 psi a

Long-term stability at ±30 °C (±54 °F) - absolute pressure from gauge and differential pressure series
In 5 years ≤ (0.25 • r)%

Step response time T63 (without electrical damping) - absolute pressure from gauge and differential pressure series
Gauge pressure series
All measuring cells Approx. 0.105 s
Differential pressure series
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.6 psi Approx. 0.195 s
1300 mbar a/130 kPa a/18.8 psi a Approx. 0.145 s
5 bar a/500 kPa a/72.5 psi a
30 bar a/3000 kPa a/435 psi a
100 bar a/10 MPa a/1450.3 psi a

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


212 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Technical data
13.3 Measuring accuracy of SITRANS P420

Effect of mounting position - absolute pressure from gauge and differential pressure series
In pressure per change of angle
● For absolute pressure (from the gauge pressure series):
≤ 0.05 mbar/0.005 kPa/0.000725 psi per 10° incline
● For absolute pressure (from the differential pressure
series): 0.7 mbar/0.07 kPa/0.001015 psi per 10° incline
(zero-point correction is possible with position error compen‐
sation)

13.3.6 Absolute pressure with front-flush diaphragm

Conformity error at limit point setting, including hysteresis and repeatability


Measuring span ratio r (spread, Turn-Down) r = max. measuring span/set measuring span and nominal
measuring range
Linear characteristic curve r ≤ 10 10 < r ≤ 30
All measuring cells ≤ 0.2% ≤ 0.4%

Effect of ambient temperature


In percent per 28 °C (50 °F)
All measuring cells ≤ (0.16 • r + 0.24)

Long-term stability at ±30 °C (±54 °F)


All measuring cells In 5 years ≤ (0.25 • r)%

Step response time T63 (without electrical damping)


Approx. 0.105 s

Effect of mounting position


In pressure per change of angle
0.04 kPa/0.4 mbar/0.006 psi per 10° incline
(zero-point correction is possible with position error compen‐
sation)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 213
Technical data
13.3 Measuring accuracy of SITRANS P420

13.3.7 Gauge pressure with front-flush diaphragm

Conformity error at limit point setting, including hysteresis and repeatability - gauge pressure with front-flush diaphragm
Measuring span ratio r (spread, Turn-Down) r = max. measuring span/set measuring span and nominal
measuring range
● Linear characteristic curve r≤5 5 < r ≤ 100
1 bar/100 kPa/14.5 psi ≤ 0.075% ≤ (0.005 • r + 0.05)%
4 bar/400 kPa/58 psi
16 bar/1.6 MPa/232 psi
63 bar/6.3 MPa/914 psi

Effect of ambient temperature - gauge pressure with front-flush diaphragm


In percent per 28 °C (50 °F)
1 bar/100 kPa/14.5 psi ≤ (0.08 • r + 0.16)%
4 bar/400 kPa/58 psi
16 bar/1.6 MPa/232 psi
63 bar/6.3 MPa/914 psi

Long-term stability at ±30 °C (±54 °F) - gauge pressure with front-flush diaphragm
1 bar/100 kPa/14.5 psi In 5 years ≤ (0.25 • r)%
4 bar/400 kPa/58 psi
16 bar/1.6 MPa/232 psi In 5 years ≤ (0.125 • r)%
63 bar/6.3 MPa/914 psi

Step response time T63 (without electrical damping) - gauge pressure with front-flush diaphragm
Approx. 0.105 s

Effect of mounting position - gauge pressure with front-flush diaphragm


≤ 0.4 mbar/0.04 kPa/0.006 psi per 10° incline
(zero-point correction is possible with position error compen‐
sation)

13.3.8 Differential pressure and flow

Conformity error at limit point setting, including hysteresis and repeatability - differential pressure and flow
Measuring span ratio r (spread, Turn-Down) r = max. measuring span/set measuring span and nomi‐
nal measuring range
Linear characteristic curve r≤5 5 < r ≤ 20
20 mbar/2 kPa/0.29 psi ≤ 0.075% ≤ (0.005 • r + 0.05)%

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


214 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Technical data
13.3 Measuring accuracy of SITRANS P420

Conformity error at limit point setting, including hysteresis and repeatability - differential pressure and flow
Linear characteristic curve r≤5 5 < r ≤ 60
60 mbar/6 kPa/0.87 psi ≤ 0.075% ≤ (0.005 • r + 0.05)%
Linear characteristic curve r≤5 5 < r ≤ 100
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi (PN160) ≤ 0.04% ≤ (0.004 • r + 0.045)%
600 mbar/60 kPa/8.70 psi
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi
30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi (PN420) ≤ 0.065%
600 mbar/60 kPa/8.70 psi
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi
30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi
Root extraction characteris‐ r≤5 5 < r ≤ 20
tic
Flow > 50%
● 20 mbar/2 kPa/0.29 psi ≤ 0.075% ≤ (0.005 • r + 0.05)%
Root extraction characteris‐ r≤5 5 < r ≤ 60
tic
Flow > 50%
● 60 mbar/6 kPa/0.87 psi ≤ 0.075% ≤ (0.005 • r + 0.05)%
Root extraction characteris‐ r≤5 5 < r ≤ 100
tic
Flow > 50%
● 250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi ≤ 0.04% ≤ (0.004 • r + 0.045)%
600 mbar/60 kPa/8.70 psi
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi
30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi
Root extraction characteris‐ r≤5 5 < r ≤ 20
tic
Flow 25 ... 50%
● 20 mbar/2 kPa/0.29 psi ≤ 0.15% ≤ (0.01 • r + 0.1)%
Root extraction characteris‐ r≤5 5 < r ≤ 60
tic
Flow 25 ... 50%
● 60 mbar/6 kPa/0.87 psi ≤ 0.15% ≤ (0.01 • r + 0.1)%
Root extraction characteris‐ r≤5 5 < r ≤ 100
tic

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 215
Technical data
13.3 Measuring accuracy of SITRANS P420

Conformity error at limit point setting, including hysteresis and repeatability - differential pressure and flow
Flow 25 ... 50%
● 250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi ≤ 0.08% ≤ (0.008 • r + 0.09)%
600 mbar/60 kPa/8.70 psi
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi
30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi

Effect of ambient temperature - differential pressure and flow


In percent per 28 °C (50 °F)
20 mbar/2 kPa/0.29 psi ≤ (0.15 • r + 0.1)%
60 mbar/6 kPa/0.87 psi ≤ (0.075 • r + 0.1)%
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi ≤ (0.025 • r + 0.0625)%
600 mbar/60 kPa/8.70 psi ≤ (0.0125 • r+0.0625)%
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi ≤ (0.025 • r + 0.0625)%
30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi ≤ (0.0125 • r+0.0625)%

Effect of static pressure - differential pressure and flow


● On the lower range value
20 mbar/2 kPa/0.29 psi ≤ (0.15 • r)% per 70 bar (zero-point correction is possible with
position error compensation)
60 mbar/6 kPa/0.87 psi ≤ (0.1 • r)% per 70 bar (zero-point correction is possible with
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi position error compensation)
600 mbar/60 kPa/8.70 psi
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi ≤ (0.15 • r)% per 70 bar (zero-point correction is possible with
position error compensation)

● On the measuring span


20 mbar/2 kPa/0.29 psi ≤ 0.2% per 70 bar
60 mbar/6 kPa/0.87 psi ≤ 0.1% per 70 bar
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi
600 mbar/60 kPa/8.70 psi
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi
30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi

Long-term stability at ±30 °C (±54 °F) - differential pressure and flow


Static pressure max. 70 bar/7 MPa/1015 psi
20 mbar/2 kPa/0.29 psi Per year ≤ (0.2 • r)%
60 mbar/6 kPa/0.87 psi In 5 years ≤ (0.25 • r)%

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


216 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Technical data
13.3 Measuring accuracy of SITRANS P420

Long-term stability at ±30 °C (±54 °F) - differential pressure and flow


250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi In 5 years ≤ (0.125 • r)%
600 mbar/60 kPa/8.70 psi In 10 years ≤ (0.15 • r)%
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi
30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi In 5 years ≤ (0.25 • r)%
In 10 years ≤ (0.35 • r)%

Step response time T63 (without electrical damping) - - differential pressure and flow (PN160)
20 mbar/2 kPa/0.29 psi Approx. 0.160 s

60 mbar/6 kPa/0.87 psi Approx. 0.150 s

250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 ps Approx. 0.135 s


600 mbar/60 kPa/8.70 psi
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi
30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi

Step response time T63 (without electrical damping) - - differential pressure and flow (PN420)
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi Approx. 0.25 s
600 mbar/60 kPa/8.70 psi Approx. 0.2 s
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi
30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi

Effect of mounting position - differential pressure and flow


Effect of mounting position In pressure per change of angle
≤ 0.7 mbar/0.07 kPa/0.028
inH2O per 10° incline
(zero-point correction is possible
with position error compensation)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 217
Technical data
13.3 Measuring accuracy of SITRANS P420

13.3.9 Level

Conformity error at limit point setting, including hysteresis and repeatability - level
Measuring span ratio r (spread, r = max. measuring span/set measuring span and nominal measuring range
Turn-Down)
● Linear characteristic curve r≤5 5 < r ≤ 10
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi ≤ 0.04% ≤ (0.004 • r + 0.045)%
600 mbar/60 kPa/8.70 psi
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi

Effect of ambient temperature1) - level


In percent per 28 °C (50 °F)
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi ≤ (0.025 • r + 0.0625)%
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi
600 mbar/60 kPa/8.70 psi ≤ (0.125 • r + 0.0625)%
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
1)
Data only applies to the basic unit. The error of the remote seal must be considered additively.

Effect of static pressure - level


● On the lower range value
50 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi ≤ (0.1 • r)% per 70 bar (zero-point correction is possible with position error
600 mbar/60 kPa/8.70 psi compensation)
600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
≤ (0.15 • r)% per 70 bar (zero-point correction is possible with position error
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi compensation)

● On the measuring span ≤ (0.1 • r)% per 70 bar

Long-term stability at ±30 °C (±54 °F) - level


All measuring cells In 5 years ≤ (0.25 • r)% static pressure max. 70 bar/7 MPa/
1015 psi

Effect of mounting position - level


Depends on the fill fluid in the
mounting flange

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


218 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Technical data
13.5 Operating conditions

13.4 Output

Output
HART
Output signal 4 … 20 mA
● Low saturation limit (continuously 3.55 mA, set to 3.8 mA in the factory
adjustable)
● High saturation limit (continuously 22.8 mA, factory-set to 20.5 mA or optionally 22.0 mA
adjustable)
● Ripple (without HART communication) ISS ≤ 0.5 % of the max. output current
Adjustable damping 0 … 100 s, continuously adjustable over remote operation
0 … 100 s, in steps of 0.1 s adjustable over display
● Current transmitter 3.55 … 22.8 mA
● Failure signal 3.55 … 22.8 mA
Load Resistor R [Ω]
● Without HART communication 8+9
5
P$

UH Power supply in V
● With HART communication
HART communicator (Handheld) R =230 … 1100 Ω
SIMATIC PDM R =230 … 600 Ω
Characteristic curve ● Linearly increasing or linearly decreasing
● Linear increase or decrease or according to the square root (only for
differential pressure and flow)
Bus physics –
Polarity-independent –

13.5 Operating conditions

Operating conditions for gauge pressure and absolute pressure (from the gauge pressure series)
Ambient conditions
● Ambient temperature
Note Observe the temperature class in hazardous areas.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 219
Technical data
13.5 Operating conditions

Operating conditions for gauge pressure and absolute pressure (from the gauge pressure series)
Enclosure
Measuring cell with sili‐ -40 … +85 °C (-40 … +185 °F)
cone oil filling
Measuring cell with inert -40 ... +85 °C (-40 ...+185 °F)
oil for gauge pressure
measuring cells 1, 4, 16
and 63 bar
Measuring cell with inert -20 … +85 °C (-4 … +185 °F)
oil
Measuring cell with FDA- -10 ...+85 °C (14 ... +185 °F)
compliant oil
Display -20 … +80 °C (-4 … +185 °F)
● Storage temperature -50 … +85 °C (-58 … +185 °F)
(for FDA-compliant oil: -20 ... + 85 °C
(-4 ... +185 °F))
Climate class in accordance 4K4H
with IEC 60721-3-4
Degree of protection accord‐ Enclosure with appropriate cable IP66/Type 4X
ing to IEC/EN 60529/UL50-E gland IP68 (2 hours at 1.5 m)
Enclosure with mounted M12 con‐ IP66/Type 4X
nector and/or lightning protection
Enclosure with mounted HAN con‐ IP65
nector
Electromagnetic compatibili‐
ty
Interference emission and In accordance with EN 61326 and
interference immunity NAMUR NE 21
Process medium conditions
● Process temperature
Cell Pressure Temperature range
Measuring cell with sili‐ -40 … +100 °C (-40 … +212 °F)
cone oil filling
Measuring cell with inert 1 bar/100 kPa/3.6 psi -40 … +100 °C (-40 … +212 °F)
oil
4 bar/400 kPa/58 psi -40 … +100 °C (-40 … +212 °F)
16 bar/1.6 MPa/232 psi -40 … +100 °C (-40 … +212 °F)
63 bar/6.3 MPa/914 psi -40 … +100 °C (-40 … +212 °F)
160 bar/16 MPa/2321 psi -20 … +100 °C (-4 … +212 °F)
400 bar/40 MPa/5802 psi -20 … +100 °C (-4 … +212 °F)
700 bar/70 MPa/10152 psi -20 … +100 °C (-4 … +212 °F)
Measuring cell with FDA- -10 ... +100 °C (14 ... +212 °F)
compliant oil

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


220 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Technical data
13.5 Operating conditions

Operating conditions for gauge pressure and absolute pressure with


flush-mounted diaphragm
Ambient conditions
● Ambient temperature
Note Observe the temperature class in hazardous areas.
Enclosure
Measuring cell with sili‐ -40 … +85 °C (-40 … +185 °F)
cone oil filling
Measuring cell with inert 1 bar/100 kPa/3.6 psi -40 … +100 °C (-40 … +212 °F)
oil (different pressure 4 bar/400 kPa/58 psi -40 … +100 °C (-40 … +212 °F)
classes)
16 bar/1.6 MPa/232 psi -40 … +100 °C (-40 … +212 °F)
63 bar/6.3 MPa/914 psi -40 … +100 °C (-40 … +212 °F)
160 bar/16 MPa/2321 psi -20 … +100 °C (-4 … +212 °F)
400 bar/40 MPa/5802 psi -20 … +100 °C (-4 … +212 °F)
700 bar/70 MPa/10152 psi -20 … +100 °C (-4 … +212 °F)
Measuring cell with FDA- -10 … +85 °C (14 … 185 °F)
compliant oil
Display -20 … +80 °C (-4 … +176 °F)
● Storage temperature -50 … +85 °C (-58 … +185 °F)
(with FDA-compliant oil: -20 ... + 85
°C (-4 ... +185 °F))
Climate class in accordance 4K4H
with IEC 60721-3-4
Degree of protection accord‐ Enclosure with appropriate cable IP66/Type 4X
ing to IEC/EN 60529/UL50-E gland IP68 (2 hours at 1.5 m)
Enclosure with mounted M12 con‐ IP66/Type 4X
nector and/or lightning protection
Enclosure with mounted HAN con‐ IP65
nector
Electromagnetic compatibili‐
ty
● Interference emission and In accordance with EN 61326 and
interference immunity NAMUR NE 21
Process medium conditions
Process temperature1)
● Measuring cell with -40 … +150°C (-40 … +302 °F)
silicone oil filling -40 … +200°C (-40 … +392 °F) with
cooling extension
● Measuring cell with inert oil -20 … +100 °C (-4 … +212 °F)
● Measuring cell with FDA- -10 … +150°C (14 … 302 °F)
compliant oil -10 … +200°C (14 … 392 °F) with
cooling extension
1)
Observe the temperature limits in the process connection standards (e.g. DIN 32676 and DIN 11851) for the maximum
process temperature for flush-mounted process connections.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 221
Technical data
13.5 Operating conditions

Operating conditions for gauge pressure and absolute pressure (from


the differential pressure series), differential pressure and flow rate
Installation conditions
● Installation instruction Any
Ambient conditions
● Ambient temperature
Note Observe the temperature class in
hazardous areas.
Enclosure
Measuring cell with sili‐ -40 … +85 °C (-40 … +185 °F)
cone oil filling
● Measuring cell ● -20 … +85 °C (-4 … +185 °F)
30 bar (435 psi), ● For flow: -20 … +85 °C (-4 …
PN420 +185 °F)
Measuring cell with inert -20 … +85 °C (-4 … +185 °F)
oil
Measuring cell with FDA- -10 … +85 °C (14 … 185 °F)
compliant oil
Display -20 … +80 °C (-4 … +185 °F)
● Storage temperature -50 … +85 °C (-58 … +185 °F)
(with FDA-compliant oil: -20 ... + 85
°C (-4 ... +185 °F))
Climate class in accordance 4K4H
with IEC 60721-3-4
Degree of protection accord‐ Enclosure with appropriate cable IP66/Type 4X
ing to IEC/EN 60529/UL50-E gland IP68 (2 hours at 1.5 m)
Enclosure with mounted M12 con‐ IP66/Type 4X
nector and/or lightning protection
Enclosure with mounted HAN con‐ IP65
nector
Electromagnetic compatibili‐
ty
Interference emission and In accordance with EN 61326 and
interference immunity NAMUR NE 21
Process medium conditions
● Process temperature
Measuring cell with sili‐ -40 … +100 °C (-40 … +212 °F)
cone oil filling
● Measuring cell -20 … +85 °C (-4 … +185 °F)
30 bar (435 psi),
PN420
Measuring cell with inert -20 … +100 °C (-4 … +212 °F)
oil
● Measuring cell -20 … +85 °C (-4 … +185 °F)
30 bar (435 psi),
PN420

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


222 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Technical data
13.5 Operating conditions

Operating conditions for gauge pressure and absolute pressure (from


the differential pressure series), differential pressure and flow rate
Measuring cell with FDA- -10 ... +100°C (14 ...+212°F)
compliant oil
In conjunction with dust -40 … +85 °C (-4 … +185 °F)
explosion protection

Operating conditions for level


Installation conditions
● Installation instruction Specified by the flange
Ambient conditions
● Ambient temperature
Note Observe the allocation of the max.
permissible operating temperature to
the max. permissible operating pres‐
sure of the relevant flange connec‐
tion.
Enclosure
Measuring cell with sili‐ -40 … +85 °C (-40 … +185 °F)
cone oil filling
Display -20 … +80 °C (-4 … +185 °F)
● Storage temperature -50 … +85 °C (-58 … +185 °F)
Climate class in accordance 4K4H
with IEC 60721-3-4
Degree of protection accord‐ Enclosure with appropriate cable IP66/Type 4X
ing to IEC/EN 60529/UL50-E gland IP68 (2 hours at 1.5 m)
Enclosure with mounted M12 con‐ IP66/Type 4X
nector and/or lightning protection
Enclosure with mounted HAN con‐ IP65
nector
Electromagnetic compatibili‐
ty
Interference emission and In accordance with EN 61326 and
interference immunity NAMUR NE 21
Process medium conditions
● Process temperature
Measuring cell with sili‐ ● Plus side: See mounting flange
cone oil filling ● Minus side: -40 … +100 °C
(-40 … +212 °F)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 223
Technical data
13.6 Vibration resistance

13.6 Vibration resistance

General operating conditions Gauge pressure series1) Differential pressure series2)


Aluminum and stainless steel enclosure Aluminum and stainless steel enclosure

Vibrations (sine) 2 ... 9 Hz at 0.3 mm


IEC 60068-2-6 9 ... 200 Hz at 5 m/s²
1 octave/min
5 cycles/axis
Continuous shocks (half-sine) 70 m/s²
IEC 60068-2-27 30 ms
6 shocks/axis
Continuous shocks (half-sine) 250 m/s²
IEC 60068-2-27 6 ms
1000 shocks/axis

1) With mounting bracket


2) Without mounting bracket

Operating conditions according to KTA Gauge pressure series1) Differential pressure series1)
3503 Aluminum and stainless steel enclosure Aluminum and stainless steel enclosure

Vibrations (sine) 9 ... 35 Hz at 10 m/s²


IEC 60068-2-6 1 octave/min
1 cycle/axis
Vibrations (sine) 5 ... 7 Hz at 20 mm
IEC 60068-2-6 9 ... 100 Hz at 20 m/s²
10 octave/min
1 cycle/axis
Continuous shocks (half-sine) 300 m/s²
IEC 60068-2-27 11 ms
6 shocks/axis

1) With mounting bracket

Operating conditions according to IEC Gauge pressure series1)


61298-3 (2g normal) Aluminum and stainless steel enclosure
Vibrations (sine) 10 ... 58 Hz at 0.3 mm
IEC 60068-2-6 58 ... 1000 Hz at 20 m/s²
1 octave/min
20 cycles/axis

1) With mounting bracket


2) Without mounting bracket

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


224 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Technical data
13.7 Construction

Operating conditions according to IEC Differential pressure series1)


61298-3 (5g enhanced) Aluminum and stainless steel enclosure
Vibrations (sine) 10 ... 58 Hz at 0.7 mm
IEC 60068-2-6 58 ... 1000 Hz at 50 m/s²
1 octave/min
20 cycles/axis

1) Without mounting bracket

Operating conditions for marine (only in Gauge pressure series1)2) Differential pressure series3)
combination with order option E):
DNV-GL (Det Norske Veritas/Germa‐ 2 ... 25 Hz at 3.2 mm
nischer Lloyd) 25 ... 100 Hz at 40 m/s²
Lloyd’s Register 0.5 octave/min
Bureau Veritas 1 frequency sweep/axis
ABS (American Bureau of Shipping) Amplification factor (Q) < 2, 30 Hz/90 min
RINA (Registro Italiano Navale) Amplification factor (Q) > 2, resonant frequency/90 min
CCS (China Classification Society)

1) Without bracket and aluminum enclosure


2) With mounting bracket, aluminum and stainless steel enclosure
3) Without mounting bracket, aluminum and stainless steel enclosure

13.7 Construction

Construction for gauge pressure and absolute pressure (from the gauge pressure series)
Weight Approx. 1.8 kg (3.9 lb) with aluminum enclosure
Approx. 3.8 kg (8.3 lb) with stainless steel enclosure
Material
● Wetted parts materials
Process connection Stainless steel, material no. 1.4404/316L or Alloy C22, material no. 2.4602
Oval flange Stainless steel, mat. no. 1.4404/316L
Seal diaphragm Stainless steel, material no. 1.4404/316L or Alloy C276, material no. 2.4819
● Non-wetted parts materials
Electronics housing ● Low-copper die-cast aluminum GD-AlSi 12 or stainless steel precision casting, mat.
no. 1.4409/ CF-3M
● Standard: Powder coating with polyurethane
Option: 2 coats: Coat 1: epoxy-based; coat 2: Polyurethane
● Stainless steel nameplate (1.4404/316L)
Mounting bracket Steel, galvanized, stainless steel 1.4301/304, stainless steel 1.4404/316L

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 225
Technical data
13.7 Construction

Construction for gauge pressure and absolute pressure (from the gauge pressure series)
Process connection ● Connection pin G1/2A in accordance with DIN EN 837-1
● Female thread 1/2‑14 NPT
● Oval flange (PN 160 (MAWP 2320 psi g)) with fastening screw thread:
– 7
/16-20 UNF in accordance with EN 61518
– M10 in accordance with DIN 19213
● Oval flange (PN 420 (MAWP 2320 psi g)) with fastening screw thread:
– 7
/16-20 UNF in accordance with EN 61518
– M12 in accordance with DIN 19213
● Male thread M20 x 1.5 and 1/2-14 NPT
Electrical connection Cable inlet using the following screwed joints:
● M20 x 1.5
● ½-14 NPT
● Han 7D/Han 8D connector1)
● M12 connector
1)
Han 8D is identical to Han 8U.

Construction for gauge pressure, with flush mounted diaphragm


Weight (pressure transmitter without Approx. 1.8 kg (3.9 lb) with aluminum enclosure
mounting flange) Approx. 3.8 kg (8.3 lb) with stainless steel enclosure
Material
● Wetted parts materials
Process connection Stainless steel, mat. no. 1.4404/316L
Seal diaphragm Stainless steel, material no. 1.4404/316L or Alloy C276, material no. 2.4819
● Non-wetted parts materials
Electronics housing ● Low-copper die-cast aluminum GD-AlSi 12 or stainless steel precision casting,
mat. no. 1.4409/CF-3M
● Standard: Powder coating with polyurethane
D20 option: 2 coats: Coat 1: epoxy-based; coat 2: Polyurethane
● Stainless steel nameplate (1.4404/316L)
Mounting bracket Steel, galvanized, stainless steel 1.4301/304, stainless steel 1.4404/316L
Process connection ● Flanges as per EN and ASME
● F&B and Pharma flange
● BioConnect/BioControl
● PMC style
Electrical connection Cable inlet using the following screwed joints:
● M20x1.5
● ½-14 NPTM
● Han 7D/Han 8D connector1)
● M12 connector
1)
Han 8D is identical to Han 8U.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


226 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Technical data
13.7 Construction

Construction for gauge pressure and absolute pressure (from the differential pressure series), differential pressure and flow
rate
Weight Approx. 3.9 kg (8.5 lb) with aluminum enclosure
Approx. 5.9 kg (13 lb) with stainless steel enclosure
Material
● Wetted parts materials
Seal diaphragm Stainless steel, mat. no. 1.4404/316L, Alloy C276, mat. no. 2.4819, Monel 400, mat.
no. 2.4360, tantalum or gold
Pressure caps and vents Stainless steel, mat. no. 1.4408 to PN 160, mat. no. 1.4571/316Ti for PN 420, Al‐
loy C22, 2.4602 or Monel 400, mat. no. 2.4360
O-ring FKM (Viton) or optionally: PTFE, FEP, FEPM and NBR
● Non-wetted parts materials
Electronics housing ● Low-copper die-cast aluminum GD‑AlSi 12 or stainless steel precision casting,
mat. no. 1.4409/CF-3M
● Standard: Powder coating with polyurethane
D20 option: 2 coats: Coat 1: epoxy-based; coat 2: Polyurethane
● Stainless steel nameplate (1.4404/316L)
Pressure cap screws Stainless steel ISO 3506-1 A4-70
Mounting bracket Steel, galvanized, stainless steel 1.4301/304, stainless steel 1.4404/316L
Process connection 1
/4‑18 NPT female thread and flange connection with 7/16-20 UNF fastening screw
thread in accordance with EN 61518 or M10 fastening screw thread in accordance
with DIN 19213 (M12 for PN 420 (MAWP 6092 psi))
Electrical connection Screw terminals
Cable inlet using the following screwed joints:
● M20 x 1.5
● ½-14 NPT
● Han 7D/Han 8D connector1)
● M12 connector
1)
Han 8D is identical to Han 8U.

Construction for level


Weight
● In accordance with EN (pressure Approx. 11 … 13 kg (24.2 … 28.7 lb) with aluminum enclosure
transmitter with mounting flange, Approx. 13 ... 15 kg (28.7 ... 33 lb) with stainless steel enclosure
without tube)
● In accordance with ASME Approx. 11 … 18 kg (24.2 … 39.7 lb) with aluminum enclosure
(pressure transmitter with Approx. 13 ... 20 kg (28.7 ... 44 lb) with stainless steel enclosure
mounting flange, without tube)
Material
● Wetted parts materials
Plus side

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 227
Technical data
13.7 Construction

Construction for level


● Seal diaphragm on the Stainless steel, mat. no. 1.4404/316L, Monel 400, mat. no. 2.4360, Alloy B2, mat.
mounting flange no. 2.4617, Alloy C276, mat. no. 2.4819, Alloy C22, mat. no. 2.4602, tantalum, PTFE
● Sealing surface Smooth as per EN 1092‑1, form B1 or ASME B16.5 RF 125 … 250 AA for stainless
steel 316L, EN 2092‑1 form B2 or ASME B16.5 RFSF for the remaining materials
Sealing material in the pressure
caps
● For standard applications FKM (Viton)
● For underpressure Copper
applications on the mounting
flange
Minus side
● Seal diaphragm Stainless steel, mat. no. 1.4404/316L
● Pressure caps locking screws Stainless steel, mat. no. 1.4408
● Locking screw Stainless steel ISO 3506-1 A4-70
● O-ring FKM (FKM (Viton))
● Non-wetted parts materials
Electronics housing ● Low-copper die-cast aluminum GD-AlSi 12 or stainless steel precision casting,
mat. no. 1.4409/CF-3M
● Standard: Powder coating with polyurethane
D20 option: 2 coats: Coat 1: epoxy-based; coat 2: Polyurethane
● Stainless steel nameplate (1.4404/316L)
Pressure cap screws Stainless steel ISO 3506-1 A4-70
Measuring cell filling Silicone oil
● Mounting flange fill fluid Silicon oil or a different design
Process connection
● Plus side Flange as per EN and ASME
● Minus side 1
/4‑18 NPT female thread and flange connection with M10 fastening screw thread in
accordance with DIN 19213 (M12 for PN 420 (MAWP 6092 psi)) or 7/16-20 UNF in
accordance with EN 61518
Electrical connection Screw terminals
Cable inlet using the following screwed joints:
● M20 x 1.5
● ½-14 NPT
● Han 7D/Han 8D connector1)
● M12 connector
1)
Han 8D is identical to Han 8U.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


228 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Technical data
13.9 Display, keyboard and auxiliary power

13.8 Torques

Torques
Cable glands/blanking plugs
● Screw-in torque for plastic gland in all enclosures 4 Nm (3 ft lb)
● Screw-in torque for metal/stainless steel glands in 6 Nm (4.4 ft lb)
aluminum/stainless steel enclosure
● Screw-in torque for NPT adapter made of metal/stainless 15 Nm (11.1 ft lb)
steel in aluminum/stainless steel enclosure
● Tightening torque for union nut made of plastic 2.5 Nm (1.8 ft lb)
● Tightening torque for union nut made of metal/stainless 4 Nm (3 ft lb)
steel
Screws for mounting bracket (option)
● Tightening torque for thread M8 or 5/16-24 UNF 18 Nm
● Tightening torque for thread M10 or 7/16-20 UNF 36 Nm
Retaining screws for rotation of the enclosure
● Tightening torque for aluminum enclosure 3.8 Nm
● Tightening torque for stainless steel enclosure 3.5 Nm

13.9 Display, keyboard and auxiliary power

Display and user interface


Buttons 4 buttons for operation directly on the device
Display ● With or without integrated display (optional)
● Cover with inspection window (optional)

Auxiliary power UH
HART
Terminal voltage on pressure transmitter ● DC 10.5 V … 45 V
● In the case of intrinsically safe operation 10.5 V … 30 V
DC
Ripple USS ≤ 0.2 V (47 … 125 Hz)
Noise Ueff ≤ 1.2 mV (0.5 … 10 kHz)
Auxiliary power –
Separate supply voltage –

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 229
Technical data
13.10 Certificates and approvals

13.10 Certificates and approvals

Certificates and approvals


Classification according to pressure equipment direc‐ ● For gases of fluid group 1 and liquids of fluid group 1; complies
tive (PED 2014/68/EU) with requirements of article 4, paragraph 3 (sound engineering
practice)
● Only for flow rate:
For gases of Fluid Group 1 and liquids of Fluid Group 1; fulfills
the basic safety requirements as per article 3, Para 1
(appendix 1); classified as category III, module H conformity
evaluation by TÜV Nord
Drinking water Available soon
● WRAS (England)
● ACS (France)
● DVGW (Germany)
● NSF (USA)
CRN (Canada) Available soon
Explosion protection in accordance with NEPSI (China) Available soon
Explosion protection in accordance with INMETRO Available soon
(Brazil)
BAM (Germany), oxygen expenditures Available soon
Explosion protection
● Intrinsic safety "i"
Designation II 1/2 G Ex ia/ib IIC T4/T6 Ga/Gb
Permissible ambient temperature -40 … +80 °C (-40 … +176 °F) temperature class T4
-40 … +70 °C (-40 … +158 °F) temperature class T6
Permissible temperature of medium -40 … +100 °C (-40 … +212 °F) temperature class T4
-40 … +70 °C (-40 … +158 °F) temperature class T6
Connection To a certified intrinsically safe circuit with the max. values:
Ui = 30 V, Ii = 101 mA, Pi = 760 mW
Ui = 29 V, Ii = 110 mA, Pi = 800 mW
Effective inner capacitance Ci = 3.29 nF
Effective inner inductance Li = 0.24 µH
● Flameproof enclosure encapsulation "d"
Designation II 1/2G Ex ia/db IIC T4/T6 Ga/Gb
Permissible ambient temperature -40 … +80 °C (-40 … +176 °F) temperature class T4
-40 … +70 °C (-40 … +158 °F) temperature class T6
Permissible temperature of medium -40 … +100 °C (-40 … +212 °F) temperature class T4
-40 … +70 °C (-40 … +158 °F) temperature class T6
Connection To a circuit with the operating values:
UH = 10.5 … 45 V DC, 4 ... 20 mA
● Dust explosion protection for Zone 20, 21, 22

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


230 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Technical data
13.10 Certificates and approvals

Certificates and approvals


Designation II 1D Ex tb IIIC T120 °C Da
II 2D Ex tb IIIC T120 °C Db
II 3D Ex tc IIIC T120 °C Dc
Permissible ambient temperature -40 ... +80 °C (-40 ... +176 °F)
Permissible temperature of medium -40 … +100 °C (-40 … +212 °F)
Max. surface temperature 120°C (248°F)
Connection To a circuit with the operating values:
UH = 10.5 … 45 V DC, 4 ... 20 mA
● Dust explosion protection for Zone 20, 21, 22
Designation II 1D Ex ia IIIC T120 °C Da
II 2D Ex ib IIIC T120 °C Db
II 3D Ex ic IIIC T120 °C Dc
Permissible ambient temperature -40 ... +80 °C (-40 ... +176 °F)
Permissible temperature of medium -40 … +100 °C (-40 … +212 °F)
Connection To a certified intrinsically safe circuit with the max. values:
Ui = 30 V, Ii = 101 mA, Pi = 760 mW
Ui = 29 V, Ii = 110 mA, Pi = 800 mW
Effective inner capacitance Ci = 3.29 nF
Effective inner inductance Li = 0.24 µH
● Type of protection for Zone 2
Designation II 3G Ex ec IIC T4/T6 Gc
II 3G Ex ic IIC T4/T6 Gc
Permissible ambient temperature "ec" -40 … +80 °C (-40 … +176 °F) temperature class T4
-40 … +40 °C (-40 … +104 °F) temperature class T6
Permissible ambient temperature "ic" -40 … +80 °C (-40 … +176 °F) temperature class T4
-40 … +80 °C (-40 … +176 °F) temperature class T6
Permissible temperature of medium -40 … +100 °C (-40 … +212 °F) temperature class T4
-40 … +70 °C (-40 … +158 °F) temperature class T6
Connection "ec" To a circuit with the operating values:
Un = 10.5 to 30 V, 4 ... 20 mA

Connection "ic" To a certified intrinsically safe circuit with the max. values:
Ui = 30 V, Ii = 101 mA, Pi = 760 mW
Ui = 29 V, Ii = 110 mA, Pi = 800 mW
Effective inner capacitance Ci = 3.29 nF
Effective inner inductance Li = 0.24 µH
● Explosion protection in accordance with FM Available soon
Designation (XP/DIP) or IS; NI; S CL I, DIV 1, GP ABCD T4 ... T6; CL II, DIV 1, GP EFG; CL III; CL
I, ZN 0/1 AEx ia IIC T4 ... T6; CL I, DIV 2, GP ABCD T4 ... T6; CL
II, DIV 2, GP FG; CL III
● Explosion protection as per CSA Available soon
Designation (XP/DIP) or (IS) CL I, DIV 1, GP ABCD T4 ... T6; CL II, DIV 1, GP EFG; CL III; Ex ia
IIC T4 ... T6: CL I, DIV 2, GP ABCD T4 ... T6; CL II, DIV 2, GP FG;
CL III

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 231
Technical data
13.10 Certificates and approvals

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


232 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Dimension drawings 14
14.1 SITRANS P320/P420 for gauge pressure and absolute pressure from
the gauge pressure series

   


 
5
           


1 approx. 96 (3.78) 17 (0.67)


2
 
6
š 

7
 
 

3 4 3

 
237 (9.33)
9

6:
 

120 (4.72)
 
DSSUR[ 

PLQ  š 105 (4.13)


   

① Electronics side, display


(longer for cover with inspection window)1)
② Connection end
③ Electrical connection:
● M20 x 1.5 gland3)
● ½-14 NPT gland
● Han 7D/Han 8D plug2) 3)
● M12 connector2)3)
④ Harting adapter
⑤ Cover over buttons and nameplate with general information
⑥ Blanking plug
⑦ Safety catch
(only for flameproof enclosure)
⑧ Process connection: G½B connection pin or oval flange
⑨ Mounting bracket (optional)
1)
In addition, allow approx. 22 mm (0.87 inch) for the thread length when removing the covers

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 233
Dimension drawings
14.1 SITRANS P320/P420 for gauge pressure and absolute pressure from the gauge pressure series

2)
Not with "flameproof enclosure" type of protection
3)
Not for "FM + CSA [is + XP]" type of protection
Figure 14-1 SITRANS P320 and SITRANS P420 pressure transmitters for absolute pressure, from the gauge pressure
series, dimensions in mm (inches)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


234 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Dimension drawings
14.2 SITRANS P320/P420 for differential pressure, gauge pressure, flow and absolute pressure from the
differential pressure series

14.2 SITRANS P320/P420 for differential pressure, gauge pressure, flow


and absolute pressure from the differential pressure series

     5

 
 
     
1

 
6
 

 
3

 
7
2 8

12 PLQ  9

 
 

 
11 10
 
DSSUR[   

š

3 4

 
   
 

① Electronics side, display


(longer for cover with inspection window)1)
② Connection end
③ Electrical connection:
● M20 x 1.5 gland
● ½-14 NPT gland
● Han 7D/Han 8D plug2) 3)
● M12 connector2)3)
④ Harting adapter
⑤ Cover over buttons and nameplate with general information
⑥ Blanking plug
⑦ Safety catch
(only for "flameproof enclosure" type of protection)
⑧ Lateral ventilation for liquid measurement (standard)
⑨ Lateral ventilation for gas measurement (addition K85)
⑩ Mounting bracket (optional)
⑪ Sealing plug, with valve (optional)
⑫ Process connection: 1/4-18 NPT (EN 61518)
1)
In addition, allow approx. 22 mm (0.87 inch) for the thread length when removing the covers
2)
Not with "flameproof enclosure" type of protection
3)
Not for "FM + CSA [IS + XP]" type of protection

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 235
Dimension drawings
14.2 SITRANS P320/P420 for differential pressure, gauge pressure, flow and absolute pressure from the
differential pressure series
Figure 14-2 SITRANS P320 and SITRANS P420 pressure transmitters for differential pressure and flow, dimensions in mm
(inches)

5
2.6 146 (5.75)



(0.1) 61 (2.4) approx. 96 (3.78) 17 (0.67) 27 (1.06) 84 (3.31)
1 6

52(2.05)
7
Ø81 (3.19)

135 (5.31)
3 4 3

approx. 224 (8.82) 6)


2

min. 92 (3.6) 8
8

approx. 85 (3.35) 5)
10

60 (2.36) 4) approx. 85 (3.35)


65 (2.56)

① Electronics side, display


(longer for cover with inspection window)1)
② Connection end
③ Electrical connection:
● M20 x 1.5 gland
● ½-14 NPT gland
● Han 7D/Han 8D plug2)3
● M12 connector2)3)
④ Harting adapter
⑤ Cover over buttons and nameplate with general information
⑥ Blanking plug
⑦ Safety catch
(only for "flameproof enclosure" type of protection)
⑧ Sealing plug, with valve (optional)
⑨ Process connection: ¼-18 NPT (IEC 61518)
⑩ Clearance for rotating the enclosure
1)
In addition, allow approx. 22 mm (0.87 inch) for the thread length when removing the covers
2)
Not with "flameproof enclosure" type of protection
3)
Not for "FM + CSA [is + XP]" type of protection
4)
74 mm (2.9 inch) for PN ≥ 420 (MAWP ≥ 6092 psi)
5)
91 mm (3.6 inch) for PN ≥ 420 (MAWP ≥ 6092 psi)
6)
226 mm (8.62 inch) for PN ≥ 420 (MAWP ≥ 6092 psi)
Figure 14-3 SITRANS P320 and SITRANS P420 pressure transmitters for differential pressure and flow with caps for vertical
pressure lines (addition K81), dimensions in mm (inches)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


236 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Dimension drawings
14.3 SITRANS P 320/P420 for level

14.3 SITRANS P 320/P420 for level


2
27 (1.06) 84 (3.31)
29 (1.14) 146 (5.75)
74 (2.31) 61 (2.4)
3 5
6
4

š 
172 (6.77)
1

135 (5.31)

min. 92 (3.62)
7 54 (2.13) 108 (4.25)

n x d2

approx. 96 (3.78) 17 (0.67)

1 8

① Electrical connection:
● M20 x 1.5 gland
● ½-14 NPT gland
● Han 7D/Han 8D plug2) 3)
● M12 connector2)3)
② Cover over buttons and nameplate with general information
③ Blanking plug
④ Safety catch
(only for "flameproof enclosure" type of protection)
⑤ Connection end
⑥ Electronics side, display
(longer for cover with inspection window)1)
⑦ Locking screw
⑧ Harting adapter
1)
In addition, allow approx. 22 mm (0.87 inch) for the thread length when removing the covers

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 237
Dimension drawings
14.4 SITRANS P320/P420 (front-flush)

2)
Not with "flameproof enclosure" type of protection
3)
Not for "FM + CSA [is + XP]" type of protection
Figure 14-4 SITRANS P320 and SITRANS P420 pressure transmitters for level, including mounting flange, dimensions in
mm (inch)

14.4 SITRANS P320/P420 (front-flush)


2.6 146 (5.74) 4

(1.06)
(0.1) 74 (2.9) 61 (2.4) 27 (1.06) 84 (3.31)

27
1

52 (2.04)
5

H1 = approx. 138 (5.43)


6

2
50 (1.97)

H 2 = approx.
55 (2.17)
7

min. 92 (3.6)

① Electronics side, display


(longer for cover with inspection window)1)
② Connection end
③ Electrical connection:
● M20 x 1.5 gland
● ½-14 NPT gland
● Han 7D/Han 8D plug2) 3)
● M12 connector2)3)
④ Cover over buttons and nameplate with general information
⑤ Blanking plug
⑥ Safety catch
(only for "flameproof enclosure" type of protection)
⑦ Process connection
1)
In addition, allow approx. 22 mm (0.87 inch) for the thread length when removing the covers
2)
Not with "flameproof enclosure" type of protection
3)
Not for "FM + CSA [is + XP]" type of protection
Figure 14-5 SITRANS P320 and SITRANS P420 pressure transmitters (front-flush), dimensions in mm (inch)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


238 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Dimension drawings
14.4 SITRANS P320/P420 (front-flush)

14.4.1 Note 3A and EHDG

Note
Approvals
The references to the approvals for "EHEDG" and "3A" refer to the respective process
connections and are not device-specific. Please refer to the technical specifications of the
respective pressure transmitter to see whether the desired certificate is available for your
device/flange combination.

14.4.2 Connections as per EN and ASME

Flange according to EN

EN 1092-1
DN PN ⊘D H2
25 40 115 mm (4.5'') Approx. 52 mm (2'')
40 40 150 mm (5.9'')
40 100 170 mm (6.7'')
+

50 16 165 mm (6.5'')
'
50 40 165 mm (6.5'')
80 16 200 mm (7.9'')
80 40 200 mm (7.9'')

Threaded connections

G3/4", G1" and G2" In accordance with DIN 3852


DN PN ⊘D H2
¾" 60 37 mm (1.5'') approx. 45 mm (1.8'')
1" 60 48 mm (1.9'') approx. 47 mm (1.9'')
2'' 60 78 mm (3.1'') Approx. 52 mm (2'')
+

'

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 239
Dimension drawings
14.4 SITRANS P320/P420 (front-flush)

Flange according to ASME

ASME B 16.5
DN CLASS ⊘D H2
1'' 150 110 mm (4.3'') Approx. 52 mm (2'')
1½" 150 125 mm (4.9'')
+

1½" 300 155 mm (6.1'')

' 2'' 150 150 mm (5.9'')


2'' 300 165 mm (6.5'')
3'' 150 190 mm (7.5'')
3'' 300 210 mm (8.1'')
4'' 150 230 mm (9.1'')
4'' 300 255 mm (10.0'')

14.4.3 F&B and pharma flange

Connections as per DIN

DIN 11851
DN PN ⊘D H2
50 25 92 mm (3.6'') Approx. 52 mm (2'')
80 25 127 mm (5.0'')
+

'

DIN 11864-1 Form A - sterile threaded sockets


DN PN ⊘D H2
50 25 78 mm (2'') Approx. 52 mm (2'')
65 25 95 mm (3.7'')
80 25 110 mm (4.3'')
100 25 130 mm (5.1'')
+

'

Approvals EHEDG

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


240 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Dimension drawings
14.4 SITRANS P320/P420 (front-flush)

DIN 11864-2 Form A - sterile collar flange


DN PN ⊘D H2
50 16 94 mm (3.7'') Approx. 52 mm (2'')
65 16 113 mm (4.4'')
80 16 133 mm (5.2'')
+

100 16 159 mm (6.3'')

'

Approvals EHEDG

DIN 11864-2 Form A - sterile groove flange


DN PN ⊘D H2
50 16 94 mm (3.7'') Approx. 52 mm (2'')
65 16 113 mm (4.4'')
80 16 133 mm (5.2'')
+

100 16 159 mm (6.3'')


'

Approvals EHEDG

DIN 11864-3 Form A - sterile collar sockets


DN PN ⊘D H2
50 25 77.5 mm (3.1'') Approx. 52 mm (2'')
65 25 91 mm (3.6'')
80 16 106 mm (4.2'')
100 16 130 mm (5.1'')
+

'

Approvals EHEDG

Tri-Clamp as per DIN 32676


DN PN ⊘D H2
50 16 64 mm (2.5'') Approx. 52 mm (2'')
65 16 91 mm (3.6'')
+

'

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 241
Dimension drawings
14.4 SITRANS P320/P420 (front-flush)

Other connections

Varivent® connector
DN PN ⊘D H2
40-125 40 84 mm (3.3'') Approx. 52 mm (2'')
+

'

Approvals EHEDG

Connection in accordance with DRD


DN PN ⊘D H2
65 40 105 mm (4.1'') Approx. 52 mm (2'')
+

'

BioConnectTM connectors

BioConnectTM screwed joint


DN PN ⊘D H2
50 16 82 mm (3.2'') Approx. 52 mm (2'')
65 16 105 mm (4.1'')
80 16 115 mm (4.5'')
100 16 145 mm (5.7'')
+

2" 16 82 mm (3.2'')
2½" 16 105 mm (4.1'')
' 3" 16 105 mm (4.1'')
4" 16 145 mm (5.7'')
Approvals EHEDG

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


242 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Dimension drawings
14.4 SITRANS P320/P420 (front-flush)

BioConnectTM flange connector


DN PN ⊘D H2
50 16 110 mm (4.3'') Approx. 52 mm (2'')
65 16 140 mm (5.5'')
80 16 150 mm (5.9'')
+

100 16 175 mm (6.9'')


' 2" 16 100 mm (3.9'')
2½" 16 110 mm (4.3'')
3" 16 140 mm (5.5'')
4" 16 175 mm (6.9'')
Approvals EHEDG

BioConnectTM clamp connector


DN PN ⊘D H2
50 16 77.4 mm (3.0") Approx. 52 mm (2'')
65 10 90.9 mm (3.6'')
80 10 106 mm (4.2'')
100 10 119 mm (4.7'')
+

2" 16 64 mm (2.5")
2½" 16 77.4 mm (3.0'')
' 3" 10 90.9 mm (3.6'')
4" 10 119 mm (4.7'')
Approvals EHEDG

Connect STM flanged joint


DN PN ⊘D H2
50 16 125 mm (4.9'') Approx. 52 mm (2'')
65 10 145 mm (5.7'')
80 10 155 mm (6.1'')
+

100 10 180 mm (7.1'')


' 2" 16 125 mm (4.9'')
2½" 10 135 mm (5.3'')
3" 10 145 mm (5.7'')
4" 10 180 mm (7.1'')
Approvals EHEDG

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 243
Dimension drawings
14.4 SITRANS P320/P420 (front-flush)

Other connections

BioControlTM connector
DN PN ⊘D H2
50 16 90 mm (3.5'') Approx. 52 mm (2'')
65 16 120 mm (4.7'')
+

'

Approvals EHEDG

14.4.4 PMC Style

Connections for the paper industry

PMC Style Standard


DN PN ⊘D H2
– – 40.9 mm (1.6'') Approx. 36.8 mm (1.4'')
M44x1.25 cap nut
+

'

PMC-Style Minibolt
DN PN ⊘D H2
– – 26.3 mm (1.0'') Approx. 33.1 mm (1.3'')
+

'

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


244 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Dimension drawings
14.4 SITRANS P320/P420 (front-flush)

14.4.5 Special connections

Tank connection

TG52/50 and TG52/150


DN PN ⊘D H2
TG52/50
25 40 63 mm (2.5'') Approx. 63 mm (2.5'')
TG52/150
25 40 63 mm (2.5'') Approx. 170 mm (6.7'')
+

'

SMS connectors

SMS sockets with union nut


DN PN ⊘D H2
2" 25 84 mm (3.3'') Approx. 52 mm (2.1'')
2½" 25 100 mm (3.9'')
3" 25 114 mm (4.5'')
+

'

SMS threaded sockets


DN PN ⊘D H2
2" 25 70 x 1/6 mm (2.8") Approx. 52 mm (2.1'')
2½" 25 85 x 1/6 mm (3.3")
3" 25 98 x 1/6 mm (3.9")
+

'

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 245
Dimension drawings
14.4 SITRANS P320/P420 (front-flush)

IDF connectors

IDF sockets with union nut


DN PN ⊘D H2
2" 25 77 mm (3.0'') Approx. 52 mm (2.1'')
2½" 25 91 mm (3.6'')
3" 25 106 mm (4.2'')
+

'

IDF threaded sockets


DN PN ⊘D H2
2" 25 64 mm (2.5'') Approx. 52 mm (2.1'')
2½" 25 77.5 mm (3.1'')
3" 25 91 mm (3.6'')
+

'

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


246 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Appendix A
A.1 Technical support

Technical Support
If this documentation does not provide complete answers to any technical questions you may
have, contact Technical Support at:
● Support request (http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request)
● More information about our Technical Support is available at
Technical support (http://www.siemens.com/automation/csi/service)

Internet Service & Support


In addition to our documentation, Siemens provides a comprehensive support solution at:
● Service&Support (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support)

Personal contact
If you have additional questions about the device, please contact your Siemens personal
contact at:
● Partner (http://www.automation.siemens.com/partner)
To find the personal contact for your product, go to "All Products and Branches" and select
"Products & Services > Industrial Automation > Process Instrumentation".

Documentation
You can find documentation on various products and systems at:
● Instructions and manuals (http://www.siemens.com/processinstrumentation/
documentation)

See also
Product information on SITRANS P in the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/sitransp)
Process instrumentation catalog (http://www.siemens.com/processinstrumentation/catalogs)
E-mail (mailto:support.automation@siemens.com)

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 247
Appendix
A.4 Checklist for Functional Safety

A.2 Certificates
You can find certificates on the Internet at Certificates (http://www.siemens.com/
processinstrumentation/certificates) or on an included DVD.

A.3 QR code label


A QR code label can be found on the device. With the use of a smart phone, the QR code
provides a direct link to a website with information specific to the device, such as manuals,
FAQs, certificates, etc.

A.4 Checklist for Functional Safety


You can use this checklist to document the steps for enabling Functional Safety.

Step 1: User PIN


Change preset user PIN 2457 ● Yes
● Setting range: 1 to 65535 ● No

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


248 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Appendix
A.4 Checklist for Functional Safety

Step 2: Validate values using the "Func‐ Values for the validation Enter validated value
tional Safety" wizard
① Device identification data (if Function‐ The values can be found on the rat‐
al Safety is enabled via remote oper‐ ing plate of the device and are dis‐
ation) played via the wizard.
● Long tag
● Product name
● Serial number
② Safety-related parameters
S1 Primary variable Pressure (the parameter cannot be
changed)
S2 Damping value 0.01 s ... 100 s in increments of
0.01 s
S3 Lower range value The value is within the measuring
limits. You can find information on
the rating plate of the device or in
the section Technical data
(Page 191)

S4 Upper range value The value is within the measuring


limits. You can find information on
the rating plate of the device or in
the section Technical data
(Page 191)
S5 Application ● Linear, proportional to pressure
(PRESS).
● Linear, proportional to level
(LEVEL).
● Proportional to flow rate, two-
step linear up to the application
point (VSLN2 or MSLN2).

③ Fingerprint (only if Functional Securi‐ The value is displayed using the


ty is enabled via remote operation) "Functional Safety" wizard.

Step 3: Fail-safe behavior


Validate the fail-safe behavior using the "Functional Safety" wizard ● Yes
● No
Enter the date of validation of the fail-safe behavior

Date when Functional Safety was enabled Signature

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 249
Appendix
A.4 Checklist for Functional Safety

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


250 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
List of abbreviations B
B.1 Pressure transmitter abbreviations

List of abbreviations

Table B-1 Units


Abbrevi‐ Display in In full Meaning
ation the edit view
bar bar bar
bar a bar absolute Pressure unit for absolute pressure
bar g bar gauge Pressure unit for gauge pressure
mbar mbar Millibars
torr torr torr
atm atm Atmospheres

inH20 a inches of water ab‐ Pressure unit for absolute pressure


solute
inH20 g inches of water Pressure unit for gauge pressure
gauge
inH2O inW60 inches of water at
(60 °F) 60 °F
inH2O (4 inW4 inches of water at 4
°C) °C
inH2O inW68 inches of water at
68 °F
inH2O (4 mmW4 millimeters of water
°C) at 4 °C
mmH2O mmW68 millimeters of water
at 68 °F
FtH2O FtW68 feet of water at 68
°F
inHg inHG inches of mercury
at 0 °C
mmHg mmHG millimeters of mer‐
cury at 0 °C
g/cm² G/cm2 grams per cm2
lb Pound Unit of weight
psi PSI pounds per square
inch
psi a psi absolute Pressure unit for absolute pressure
psi g psi gauge Pressure unit for gauge pressure
Pa Pa Pascal
KPa KPa Kilopascal
MPa MPa Megapascal

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 251
List of abbreviations
B.1 Pressure transmitter abbreviations

Abbrevi‐ Display in In full Meaning


ation the edit view
hPa hPa Hectopascal
Pa a Pascal absolute Pressure unit for absolute pressure
Pa g Pascal gauge Pressure unit for gauge pressure

Table B-2 Other abbreviations


Abbreviation In full Meaning
PED Pressure Equipment Directive
HART Highway Addressable Remote Transducer Standardized protocol for transmission of information between field
device and automation system.
LRL Engl.: Lower Range Limit Lower end of the measuring range
LRV Engl.: Lower Range Value Lower end of the set measuring span
MA Start of scale value Lower end of the set measuring span
ME Full scale value Upper end of the set measuring span
MAWP Engl.: Maximum Allowable Working Pressure Maximum permissible operating pressure
(PS)
NFPA National Fire Protection Association US - American Fire Protection Organization
F&B Food and beverage industry
PDM Engl.: Process Device Manager Tool for communication with HART devices (manufacturer: Siemens)
URL Engl.: Upper Range Limit Upper end of the measuring range
URV Engl.: Upper Range Value Upper end of the set measuring span

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


252 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Glossary

ATEX
ATEX is an abbreviation of the French term "Atmosphère explosible" (potentially explosive
atmosphere). ATEX stands for both EC directives in the area of explosion protection: ATEX
product directive 94/9/EC and ATEX operating directive 1999/92/EC.

Auxiliary power supply


Auxiliary power supply refers to an electrical supply or reference voltage which some electrical
circuits require apart from the standard supply. The auxiliary power supply can, for example,
be specially stabilized, have a particular level or polarity and/or other properties which are
important for the correct functioning of switch components.

Auxiliary voltage
→ Auxiliary power supply

Dangerous failure
Failure with the potential to switch a safety-instrumented system to a hazardous or non-
functioning safety state.

EEPROM
EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory): a non-volatile, electronic
memory module.
EEPROMs are often used where individual bytes of data (e.g. configuration data or runtime
meters) change over time and must be stored safely in the event of a mains power failure.

Failure/Fault/Error
Failure:
A resource is no longer capable of executing a required function.
Fault/Error:
Undesired state of a resource indicated by its incapability of executing a required function.

Fault/Error
→ Failure/Fault/Error

Final controlling element


Converter that converts electrical signals into mechanical or other non-electric variables.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 253
Glossary

Fingerprint
Numerical value generated by the device when you start safety validation via the "Functional
Safety" wizard. By comparing the fingerprint, you determine whether or not the device and
the safety-related parameters have changed erroneously during activation of the functional
safety.

Firmware
Firmware (FW) is software that is embedded on a chip in electronic devices – in contrast to
software which is saved on hard disks, CD-ROMs or other media. These days, firmware is
mostly stored in a flash memory or EEPROM.
Firmware usually contains the elementary functions for controlling the device, as well as input
and output routines.

Frequency shift keying


Frequency shift keying is a simple form of modulation, where the digital values 0 and 1
modulate the actual current signal by means of two different frequencies.

Frequency Shift Keying (FSK)


→ Frequency shift keying

HART
HART (Highway Addressable Remote Transducer) is a standardized, widely used
communications system used to structure industrial fieldbusses. The communications system
provides digital communications for multiple participants (field devices) via a common databus.
HART is based especially on the equally widely used 4/20 mA standard for the transfer of
analog sensor signals. The cabling from existing older systems can be used directly and both
systems operated in parallel.
HART specifies several protocol levels in the OSI model. It facilitates the transfer of process
and diagnostics data and control signals between field devices and high-level control systems.
Standardized parameter sets can be used for the manufacture-independent operation of all
HART devices.
Typical applications include transmitters for measuring mechanical and electrical dimensions.

Non-volatile memory
→ EEPROM

Risk
Combination of the probability of damage occurring and the extent of the damage.

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


254 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Glossary

Safety function
Defined function executed by a safety-instrumented system with the objective of attaining or
maintaining a safe system state by taking a defined hazardous incident into account.
Example:
Limit pressure monitoring

Safety Integrity Level


→ SIL

Safety-instrumented system
A safety-instrumented system (SIS) executes the safety functions that are required to achieve
or maintain a safe state in a system. It consists of a sensor, logic unit/control system and final
controlling element.
Example:
A safety-instrumented system is made up of a pressure transmitter, a limit signal sensor and
a control valve.

Sensor
Converter that converts mechanical or other non-electric variables into electrical signals.

SIL
The international standard IEC 61508 defines four discrete safety integrity levels (SIL) from
SIL 1 to SIL 4. Each level corresponds to a probability range for the failure of a safety function.
The higher the SIL of the safety-instrumented system, the higher the probability that the
required safety function will work.
The SIL which can be achieved is determined by the following safety-instrumented
characteristics:
● Average probability of failure on demand (PFDAVG)
● Hardware fault tolerance (HFT)
● Safe failure fraction (SFF)

Total error
Total Error is sum of Total Performance and the long-term stability.

Total Error(s)
→ Total error

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 255
Glossary

Total Performance
Total Performance is the square root of the sum of the squares of the three deviations resulting
from the influence of the static pressure, the temperature and the characteristic deviation.

TP
→ Total Performance

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


256 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Index
Documentation, 247

3
3A, 239
E
Edit view, 76
EHEDG, 239
A Electromagnetic compatibility, 220, 221, 222, 223
EMC, 220, 221, 222, 223
ACCES
ETEMP, 123
INVALID CFG, 190
Ambient temperature, 219, 221, 222, 223
Effect, 203, 213
Application, , (Transfer function)
F
APPLY LRV, 75 Fail-safe behavior, 154
APPLY URV, 75 FAULT CURR, 75
Approval Filling liquid, 31, 34, 36
3A, 239 Fingerprint, 165
EHEDG, 239 Flange, 46
FLAT, 108
FUNCT SAFETY, 75
B Function chart, 32
Bidirectional flow measurement, 112
Blowout valve, 89
Blowout valves, 91
H
Bridge output voltage, 31, 35, 36 HALF, 108
BUTTON LOCK, 75 HART
Modem, 38
Hazardous area
C Laws and directives, 19
Qualified personnel, 21
Certificates, 19, 248
Hotlline, (Refer to Support request)
CHANGE PIN, 75
Compact Operating Instructions, 247
CONIC, 108
CUSTM, 108
I
Customer Support, (Refer to Technical Support) Identification data
CYLIN, 108 define, 143
IDENTIFY, 75
In accordance with the square root function
D see square-root extraction, 111
Install
DAMPING, 74
Remote seal, 50
DEVICE MODE, 75
Installation, 43
Diagnostic messages, 184
Instuctions and manuals, 247
Differential pressure, 24
Direct sunlight, 42
Disassembly, 54
Display, 70
J
DISPLAY TEST, 75 Jumper, 79
Document history, 15

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 257
Index

Overview of parameters and functions, 97

L
Laws and directives
P
Disassembly, 19 PARAB, 108
Personell, 19 PARAE, 108
Layout of nameplate with general information, 26 PARAM
LEVEL, 108, 123 INVALID CFG, 190
LEVEL UNITS, 75 Parameter view, 74
LO FAULT CUR, 75 PIN RECOVERY, 75
Load, 219 PRESS, 108
Long tag, (TAG) PRESS UNITS, 74
LOOP TEST, 75 PRESSURE REF, 75
LOOPT Pressure reference, 101
INVALID CFG, 190 Pressure units, 101
LOW FLOW CUT, 75 Process connection, 25
Low flow cut-off, 111, 128
LOWER RANGE, 74
LOWER SCALNG, 75 Q
QR code label, 248
Qualified personnel, 21
M Quick start wizard, 97
Manuals, 247
MAWP, 252
Measurement view, 72 R
Measuring cell
RECOVERY ID, 75
Absolute pressure, 32
Remote seal
Differential pressure and flow rate, 35
Description, 37
Gauge pressure, 31
Install, 50
Level, 36
Maintenance, 176
MFLOW, 123
RESET, 75
MFLOW UNITS, 75
Modifications
correct usage, 20
improper, 20
S
Mounting flange, 36 Safety parameters, 156
MSL2B, 108 Safety-related parameters, 159
MSLN, 108 SATURAT HI, 75
MSLN2, 108 SATURAT LOW, 75
MSOFF, 108 Scope of delivery, 16
multi-channel operation, 155 Service, 247
MWP, (See MAWP) Service & Support, 247
Internet, 247
Shut-off valve, 90, 91, 93, 95
N SIL 2
Single-channel operation, 155
Nameplate, 26
SIL 3, 155
SIMUL
INVALID CFG, 190
O SPHER, 108
Operating Instructions, 247 SQRT POINT, 75

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


258 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA
Index

Square root function


Hold at 0, square root, 111
Linear, square root, 111 W
Two step linear, square root, 112
Warranty, 17
Stabilizing valve, 91, 92, 93, 95
Write protection, 79
START VIEW, 75
Structure, 25
STSIM
INVALID CFG, 190
Z
Support, 247 ZERO POINT, 75
Support request, 247
SV SELECT, 75

T
Tank connection, 245
Technical Support, 247
Partner,
Personal contact, 247
TEMP, 123
TEMP UNITS, 75
Test certificates, 19
TRNFK
INVALID CFG, 190

U
UP FAULT CUR, 75
UPPER RANGE, 74
UPPER SCALNG, 75
Useful lifetime, 156
USER, 123
User PIN, 134
Factory setting, 131

V
Vent valve, 93, 95
VESSEL DIM A, 75
VESSEL DIM L, 75
VFLOW, 123
VFLOW UNITS, 75
VLIN, 108
VOL, 123
VOL UNITS, 75
VSL2B, 108
VSLN, 108
VSLN2, 108
VSOFF, 108

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA 259
Index

SITRANS P320/P420 (mA/HART)


260 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E44852162-AA

You might also like